Add assembler, disassembler and linker support for power9.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout-bout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BOUT
44 @set aout-bout
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}]
238 [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}]
239 [@b{--hash-size}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}]
240 [@b{--statistics}]
241 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}]
242 [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}]
243 [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
244 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
245 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
246 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
247 @c
248 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
249 @c Add an empty line for separation.
250 @ifset AARCH64
251
252 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
253 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
254 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
255 @end ifset
256 @ifset ALPHA
257
258 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
259 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
260 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
261 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
262 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
263 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
264 @end ifset
265 @ifset ARC
266
267 @emph{Target ARC options:}
268 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
269 [@b{-mA6}|@b{-mARC600}|@b{-mARC601}|@b{-mA7}|@b{-mARC700}|@b{-mEM}|@b{-mHS}]
270 [@b{-mcode-density}]
271 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
272 @end ifset
273 @ifset ARM
274
275 @emph{Target ARM options:}
276 @c Don't document the deprecated options
277 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
278 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
279 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
280 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
281 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
282 [@b{-mthumb}]
283 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
284 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
285 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
286 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
287 @end ifset
288 @ifset Blackfin
289
290 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
291 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
292 [@b{-mfdpic}]
293 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
294 [@b{-mnopic}]
295 @end ifset
296 @ifset CRIS
297
298 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
299 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
300 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
301 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
302 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
303 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
304 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
305 @end ifset
306 @ifset D10V
307
308 @emph{Target D10V options:}
309 [@b{-O}]
310 @end ifset
311 @ifset D30V
312
313 @emph{Target D30V options:}
314 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
315 @end ifset
316 @ifset EPIPHANY
317
318 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
319 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
320 @end ifset
321 @ifset H8
322
323 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
324 [-h-tick-hex]
325 @end ifset
326 @ifset HPPA
327 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
328 @end ifset
329 @ifset I80386
330
331 @emph{Target i386 options:}
332 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
333 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
334 @end ifset
335 @ifset I960
336
337 @emph{Target i960 options:}
338 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
339 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
340 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
341 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
342 @end ifset
343 @ifset IA64
344
345 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
346 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
347 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
348 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
349 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
350 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
351 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
352 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
353 @end ifset
354 @ifset IP2K
355
356 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
357 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
358 @end ifset
359 @ifset M32C
360
361 @emph{Target M32C options:}
362 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
363 @end ifset
364 @ifset M32R
365
366 @emph{Target M32R options:}
367 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
368 @b{--W[n]p}]
369 @end ifset
370 @ifset M680X0
371
372 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
373 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
374 @end ifset
375 @ifset M68HC11
376
377 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
378 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
379 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
380 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
381 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
382 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
383 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
384 @end ifset
385 @ifset MCORE
386
387 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
388 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
389 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
390 @end ifset
391 @ifset METAG
392
393 @emph{Target Meta options:}
394 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
395 @end ifset
396 @ifset MICROBLAZE
397 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
398 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
399 @end ifset
400 @ifset MIPS
401
402 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
403 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
404 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
405 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
406 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
407 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
408 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
409 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
410 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
411 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
412 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
413 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
414 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
415 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
416 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
417 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
418 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
419 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
420 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
421 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
422 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
423 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
424 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
425 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
426 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
427 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
428 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
429 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
430 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
431 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
432 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
433 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
434 @end ifset
435 @ifset MMIX
436
437 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
438 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
439 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
440 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
441 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
442 @end ifset
443 @ifset NIOSII
444
445 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
446 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
447 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
448 @end ifset
449 @ifset NDS32
450
451 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
452 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
453 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
454 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
455 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
456 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
457 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
458 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
459 [@b{-mb2bb}]
460 @end ifset
461 @ifset PDP11
462
463 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
464 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
465 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
466 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
467 @end ifset
468 @ifset PJ
469
470 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
471 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
472 @end ifset
473 @ifset PPC
474
475 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
476 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
477 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
478 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
479 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
480 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
481 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-mpower9}|@b{-mpwr9}@b{-ma2}|
482 @b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
483 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
484 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
485 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
486 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
487 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
488 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
489 @end ifset
490 @ifset RL78
491
492 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
493 [@b{-mg10}]
494 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
495 @end ifset
496 @ifset RX
497
498 @emph{Target RX options:}
499 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
500 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
501 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
502 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
503 [@b{-mpid}]
504 [@b{-mrelax}]
505 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
506 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
507 @end ifset
508 @ifset S390
509
510 @emph{Target s390 options:}
511 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
512 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
513 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
514 @end ifset
515 @ifset SCORE
516
517 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
518 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
519 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
520 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
521 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
522 @end ifset
523 @ifset SPARC
524
525 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
526 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
527 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
528 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
529 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
530 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
531 @end ifset
532 @ifset TIC54X
533
534 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
535 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
536 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
537 @end ifset
538 @ifset TIC6X
539
540 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
541 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
542 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
543 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
544 @end ifset
545 @ifset TILEGX
546
547 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
548 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
549 @end ifset
550 @ifset TILEPRO
551 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
552 @end ifset
553 @ifset VISIUM
554
555 @emph{Target Visium options:}
556 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
557 @end ifset
558 @ifset XTENSA
559
560 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
561 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]auto-litpools}]
562 [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
563 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
564 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
565 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
566 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
567 @end ifset
568 @ifset Z80
569
570 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
571 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
572 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
573 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
574 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
575 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
576 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
577 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
578 @end ifset
579 @ifset Z8000
580
581 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
582 @end ifset
583
584 @c man end
585 @end smallexample
586
587 @c man begin OPTIONS
588
589 @table @gcctabopt
590 @include at-file.texi
591
592 @item -a[cdghlmns]
593 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
594
595 @table @gcctabopt
596 @item -ac
597 omit false conditionals
598
599 @item -ad
600 omit debugging directives
601
602 @item -ag
603 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
604
605 @item -ah
606 include high-level source
607
608 @item -al
609 include assembly
610
611 @item -am
612 include macro expansions
613
614 @item -an
615 omit forms processing
616
617 @item -as
618 include symbols
619
620 @item =file
621 set the name of the listing file
622 @end table
623
624 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
625 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
626 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
627
628 @item --alternate
629 Begin in alternate macro mode.
630 @ifclear man
631 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
632 @end ifclear
633
634 @item --compress-debug-sections
635 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the
636 ELF ABI. The resulting object file may not be compatible with older
637 linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression would make a
638 given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed.
639
640 @ifset ELF
641 @cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
642 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
643 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
644 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
645 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
646 These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
647 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
648 @option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
649 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
650 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to
651 @option{--compress-debug-sections}.
652 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
653 sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed to begin with
654 @samp{.zdebug}. Note if compression would make a given section
655 @emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed.
656
657 @end ifset
658
659 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
660 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is usually the default for all
661 targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to
662 override this.
663
664 @item -D
665 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
666 other assemblers.
667
668 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
669 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
670 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
671
672 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
673 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
674 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
675 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
676 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
677 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
678
679 @item -f
680 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
681 compiler output).
682
683 @item -g
684 @itemx --gen-debug
685 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
686 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
687 ECOFF or DWARF2.
688
689 @item --gstabs
690 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
691 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
692
693 @item --gstabs+
694 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
695 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
696 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
697 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
698 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
699
700 @item --gdwarf-2
701 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
702 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
703 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
704
705 @item --gdwarf-sections
706 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
707 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
708 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
709 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
710 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
711 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
712 suffix.
713
714 @item --size-check=error
715 @itemx --size-check=warning
716 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
717
718 @item --help
719 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
720
721 @item --target-help
722 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
723
724 @item -I @var{dir}
725 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
726
727 @item -J
728 Don't warn about signed overflow.
729
730 @item -K
731 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
732 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
733 @end ifclear
734 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
735 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
736 @end ifset
737
738 @item -L
739 @itemx --keep-locals
740 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
741 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
742 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
743 @ifclear man
744 @xref{Symbol Names}.
745 @end ifclear
746
747 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
748 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
749 listing to @var{number}.
750
751 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
752 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
753 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
754
755 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
756 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
757 @var{number} bytes.
758
759 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
760 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
761 to @var{number} + 1.
762
763 @item -o @var{objfile}
764 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
765
766 @item -R
767 Fold the data section into the text section.
768
769 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
770 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
771 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
772 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
773 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
774 requirements at the expense of speed.
775
776 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
777 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
778 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
779 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
780
781 @ifset ELF
782 @item --sectname-subst
783 Honor substitution sequences in section names.
784 @ifclear man
785 @xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
786 @end ifclear
787 @end ifset
788
789 @item --statistics
790 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
791 assembly.
792
793 @item --strip-local-absolute
794 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
795
796 @item -v
797 @itemx -version
798 Print the @command{as} version.
799
800 @item --version
801 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
802
803 @item -W
804 @itemx --no-warn
805 Suppress warning messages.
806
807 @item --fatal-warnings
808 Treat warnings as errors.
809
810 @item --warn
811 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
812
813 @item -w
814 Ignored.
815
816 @item -x
817 Ignored.
818
819 @item -Z
820 Generate an object file even after errors.
821
822 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
823 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
824
825 @end table
826 @c man end
827
828 @ifset AARCH64
829
830 @ifclear man
831 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
832 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
833 @end ifclear
834
835 @ifset man
836 @c man begin OPTIONS
837 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
838 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
839 @c man end
840 @c man begin INCLUDE
841 @include c-aarch64.texi
842 @c ended inside the included file
843 @end ifset
844
845 @end ifset
846
847 @ifset ALPHA
848
849 @ifclear man
850 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
851 for an Alpha processor.
852 @end ifclear
853
854 @ifset man
855 @c man begin OPTIONS
856 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
857 processor.
858 @c man end
859 @c man begin INCLUDE
860 @include c-alpha.texi
861 @c ended inside the included file
862 @end ifset
863
864 @end ifset
865
866 @c man begin OPTIONS
867 @ifset ARC
868 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an ARC
869 processor.
870
871 @table @gcctabopt
872 @item -mcpu=@var{cpu}
873 This option selects the core processor variant.
874 @item -EB | -EL
875 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
876 @item -mcode-density
877 Enable Code Density extenssion instructions.
878 @end table
879 @end ifset
880
881 @ifset ARM
882 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
883 processor family.
884
885 @table @gcctabopt
886 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
887 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
888 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
889 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
890 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
891 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
892 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
893 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
894 @item -mthumb
895 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
896 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
897 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
898 @item -EB | -EL
899 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
900 @item -mthumb-interwork
901 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
902 ARM code in mind.
903 @item -mccs
904 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
905 @item -k
906 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
907 @end table
908 @end ifset
909 @c man end
910
911 @ifset Blackfin
912
913 @ifclear man
914 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
915 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
916 @end ifclear
917
918 @ifset man
919 @c man begin OPTIONS
920 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
921 the Blackfin processor family.
922 @c man end
923 @c man begin INCLUDE
924 @include c-bfin.texi
925 @c ended inside the included file
926 @end ifset
927
928 @end ifset
929
930 @c man begin OPTIONS
931 @ifset CRIS
932 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
933 @end ifset
934
935 @ifset D10V
936 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
937 a D10V processor.
938 @table @gcctabopt
939 @cindex D10V optimization
940 @cindex optimization, D10V
941 @item -O
942 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
943 @end table
944 @end ifset
945
946 @ifset D30V
947 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
948 processor.
949 @table @gcctabopt
950 @cindex D30V optimization
951 @cindex optimization, D30V
952 @item -O
953 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
954
955 @cindex D30V nops
956 @item -n
957 Warn when nops are generated.
958
959 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
960 @item -N
961 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
962 @end table
963 @end ifset
964 @c man end
965
966 @ifset EPIPHANY
967 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
968 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
969
970 @ifclear man
971 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
972 configured for an Epiphany processor.
973 @end ifclear
974
975 @ifset man
976 @c man begin OPTIONS
977 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
978 an Epiphany processor.
979 @c man end
980 @c man begin INCLUDE
981 @include c-epiphany.texi
982 @c ended inside the included file
983 @end ifset
984
985 @end ifset
986
987 @ifset H8300
988
989 @ifclear man
990 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
991 for an H8/300 processor.
992 @end ifclear
993
994 @ifset man
995 @c man begin OPTIONS
996 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
997 processor.
998 @c man end
999 @c man begin INCLUDE
1000 @include c-h8300.texi
1001 @c ended inside the included file
1002 @end ifset
1003
1004 @end ifset
1005
1006 @ifset I80386
1007
1008 @ifclear man
1009 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1010 configured for an i386 processor.
1011 @end ifclear
1012
1013 @ifset man
1014 @c man begin OPTIONS
1015 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1016 an i386 processor.
1017 @c man end
1018 @c man begin INCLUDE
1019 @include c-i386.texi
1020 @c ended inside the included file
1021 @end ifset
1022
1023 @end ifset
1024
1025 @c man begin OPTIONS
1026 @ifset I960
1027 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1028 Intel 80960 processor.
1029
1030 @table @gcctabopt
1031 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
1032 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
1033
1034 @item -b
1035 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
1036
1037 @item -no-relax
1038 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
1039 error if necessary.
1040
1041 @end table
1042 @end ifset
1043
1044 @ifset IP2K
1045 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1046 Ubicom IP2K series.
1047
1048 @table @gcctabopt
1049
1050 @item -mip2022ext
1051 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1052
1053 @item -mip2022
1054 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1055 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1056
1057 @end table
1058 @end ifset
1059
1060 @ifset M32C
1061 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1062 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1063
1064 @table @gcctabopt
1065
1066 @item -m32c
1067 Assemble M32C instructions.
1068
1069 @item -m16c
1070 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1071
1072 @item -relax
1073 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1074
1075 @item -h-tick-hex
1076 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1077
1078 @end table
1079 @end ifset
1080
1081 @ifset M32R
1082 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1083 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1084
1085 @table @gcctabopt
1086
1087 @item --m32rx
1088 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1089 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1090
1091 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1092 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1093 encountered.
1094
1095 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1096 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1097 encountered.
1098
1099 @end table
1100 @end ifset
1101
1102 @ifset M680X0
1103 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1104 Motorola 68000 series.
1105
1106 @table @gcctabopt
1107
1108 @item -l
1109 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1110
1111 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1112 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1113 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1114 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1115 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1116
1117 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1118 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1119 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1120 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1121 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1122 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1123
1124 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1125 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1126 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1127
1128 @end table
1129 @end ifset
1130
1131 @ifset NIOSII
1132
1133 @ifclear man
1134 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1135 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1136 @end ifclear
1137
1138 @ifset man
1139 @c man begin OPTIONS
1140 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1141 Altera Nios II processor.
1142 @c man end
1143 @c man begin INCLUDE
1144 @include c-nios2.texi
1145 @c ended inside the included file
1146 @end ifset
1147 @end ifset
1148
1149 @ifset PDP11
1150
1151 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1152 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1153
1154 @table @gcctabopt
1155 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1156 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1157 default is @option{-mpic}.
1158
1159 @item -mall
1160 @itemx -mall-extensions
1161 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1162
1163 @item -mno-extensions
1164 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1165
1166 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1167 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1168
1169 @item -m@var{cpu}
1170 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1171 disable all other extensions.
1172
1173 @item -m@var{machine}
1174 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1175 model, and disable all other extensions.
1176 @end table
1177
1178 @end ifset
1179
1180 @ifset PJ
1181 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1182 a picoJava processor.
1183
1184 @table @gcctabopt
1185
1186 @cindex PJ endianness
1187 @cindex endianness, PJ
1188 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1189 @item -mb
1190 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1191
1192 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1193 @item -ml
1194 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1195
1196 @end table
1197 @end ifset
1198
1199 @ifset M68HC11
1200 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1201 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1202
1203 @table @gcctabopt
1204
1205 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1206 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1207 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1208
1209 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1210 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1211 XGATE address space.
1212
1213 @item -mshort
1214 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1215
1216 @item -mlong
1217 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1218
1219 @item -mshort-double
1220 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1221
1222 @item -mlong-double
1223 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1224
1225 @item --force-long-branches
1226 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1227 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1228 sub routine.
1229
1230 @item -S | --short-branches
1231 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1232 when the offset is out of range.
1233
1234 @item --strict-direct-mode
1235 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1236 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1237
1238 @item --print-insn-syntax
1239 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1240
1241 @item --print-opcodes
1242 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1243
1244 @item --generate-example
1245 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1246 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1247
1248 @end table
1249 @end ifset
1250
1251 @ifset SPARC
1252 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1253 for the SPARC architecture:
1254
1255 @table @gcctabopt
1256 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1257 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1258 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1259
1260 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1261 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1262
1263 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1264 UltraSPARC extensions.
1265
1266 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1267 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1268 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1269
1270 @item -bump
1271 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1272 @end table
1273 @end ifset
1274
1275 @ifset TIC54X
1276 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1277 architecture.
1278
1279 @table @gcctabopt
1280 @item -mfar-mode
1281 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1282 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1283 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1284 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1285 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1286 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1287 behaviour in the shell.
1288 @end table
1289 @end ifset
1290
1291 @ifset MIPS
1292 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1293 a MIPS processor.
1294
1295 @table @gcctabopt
1296 @item -G @var{num}
1297 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1298 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1299 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1300
1301 @cindex MIPS endianness
1302 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1303 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1304 @item -EB
1305 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1306
1307 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1308 @item -EL
1309 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1310
1311 @cindex MIPS ISA
1312 @item -mips1
1313 @itemx -mips2
1314 @itemx -mips3
1315 @itemx -mips4
1316 @itemx -mips5
1317 @itemx -mips32
1318 @itemx -mips32r2
1319 @itemx -mips32r3
1320 @itemx -mips32r5
1321 @itemx -mips32r6
1322 @itemx -mips64
1323 @itemx -mips64r2
1324 @itemx -mips64r3
1325 @itemx -mips64r5
1326 @itemx -mips64r6
1327 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1328 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1329 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1330 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1331 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1332 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1333 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1334 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1335 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1336 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1337
1338 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1339 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1340
1341 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1342 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1343
1344 @item -mfix7000
1345 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1346 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1347 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1348
1349 @item -mfix-rm7000
1350 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1351 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1352 followed by a load instruction.
1353
1354 @item -mdebug
1355 @itemx -no-mdebug
1356 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1357 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1358
1359 @item -mpdr
1360 @itemx -mno-pdr
1361 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1362
1363 @item -mgp32
1364 @itemx -mfp32
1365 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1366 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1367 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1368 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1369
1370 @item -mgp64
1371 @itemx -mfp64
1372 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1373 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1374 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1375 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1376
1377 @item -mfpxx
1378 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1379 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1380 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
1381 32 or 64 bits wide.
1382
1383 @item -modd-spreg
1384 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1385 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1386 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1387 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1388
1389 @item -mips16
1390 @itemx -no-mips16
1391 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1392 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1393 turns off this option.
1394
1395 @item -mmicromips
1396 @itemx -mno-micromips
1397 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1398 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1399 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1400 at the start of the assembly file.
1401
1402 @item -msmartmips
1403 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1404 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1405 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1406 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1407
1408 @item -mips3d
1409 @itemx -no-mips3d
1410 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1411 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1412 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1413
1414 @item -mdmx
1415 @itemx -no-mdmx
1416 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1417 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1418 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1419
1420 @item -mdsp
1421 @itemx -mno-dsp
1422 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1423 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1424 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1425
1426 @item -mdspr2
1427 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1428 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1429 This option implies -mdsp.
1430 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1431 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1432
1433 @item -mmsa
1434 @itemx -mno-msa
1435 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1436 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1437 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1438
1439 @item -mxpa
1440 @itemx -mno-xpa
1441 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1442 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1443 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1444
1445 @item -mmt
1446 @itemx -mno-mt
1447 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1448 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1449 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1450
1451 @item -mmcu
1452 @itemx -mno-mcu
1453 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1454 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1455 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1456
1457 @item -minsn32
1458 @itemx -mno-insn32
1459 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1460 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1461 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1462 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1463 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1464 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1465 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1466
1467 @item --construct-floats
1468 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1469 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1470 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1471 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1472 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1473 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1474
1475 @item --relax-branch
1476 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1477 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1478 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1479 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1480
1481 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1482 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1483 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1484
1485 @cindex emulation
1486 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1487 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1488 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1489 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1490 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1491
1492 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1493 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1494 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1495 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1496 preferred options instead.
1497
1498 @item -nocpp
1499 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1500 the native tools.
1501
1502 @item --trap
1503 @itemx --no-trap
1504 @itemx --break
1505 @itemx --no-break
1506 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1507 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1508 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1509 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1510 break exception.
1511
1512 @item -n
1513 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1514 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1515 @end table
1516 @end ifset
1517
1518 @ifset MCORE
1519 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1520 an MCore processor.
1521
1522 @table @gcctabopt
1523 @item -jsri2bsr
1524 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1525 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1526 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1527
1528 @item -sifilter
1529 @itemx -nosifilter
1530 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1531 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1532
1533 @item -relax
1534 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1535
1536 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1537 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1538 can be assembled.
1539
1540 @item -EB
1541 Assemble for a big endian target.
1542
1543 @item -EL
1544 Assemble for a little endian target.
1545
1546 @end table
1547 @end ifset
1548 @c man end
1549
1550 @ifset METAG
1551
1552 @ifclear man
1553 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1554 for a Meta processor.
1555 @end ifclear
1556
1557 @ifset man
1558 @c man begin OPTIONS
1559 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1560 Meta processor.
1561 @c man end
1562 @c man begin INCLUDE
1563 @include c-metag.texi
1564 @c ended inside the included file
1565 @end ifset
1566
1567 @end ifset
1568
1569 @c man begin OPTIONS
1570 @ifset MMIX
1571 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1572 @end ifset
1573
1574 @ifset NDS32
1575
1576 @ifclear man
1577 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1578 for a NDS32 processor.
1579 @end ifclear
1580 @c ended inside the included file
1581 @end ifset
1582
1583 @ifset man
1584 @c man begin OPTIONS
1585 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1586 NDS32 processor.
1587 @c man end
1588 @c man begin INCLUDE
1589 @include c-nds32.texi
1590 @c ended inside the included file
1591 @end ifset
1592
1593 @c man end
1594 @ifset PPC
1595
1596 @ifclear man
1597 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1598 for a PowerPC processor.
1599 @end ifclear
1600
1601 @ifset man
1602 @c man begin OPTIONS
1603 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1604 PowerPC processor.
1605 @c man end
1606 @c man begin INCLUDE
1607 @include c-ppc.texi
1608 @c ended inside the included file
1609 @end ifset
1610
1611 @end ifset
1612
1613 @c man begin OPTIONS
1614 @ifset RX
1615 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1616 @end ifset
1617
1618 @ifset S390
1619 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1620 processor family.
1621
1622 @table @gcctabopt
1623 @item -m31
1624 @itemx -m64
1625 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1626 @item -mesa
1627 @item -mzarch
1628 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1629 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1630 @item -march=@var{processor}
1631 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1632 @samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, @samp{z10},
1633 @samp{z196}, @samp{zEC12}, or @samp{z13}.
1634 @item -mregnames
1635 @itemx -mno-regnames
1636 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1637 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1638 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1639 but evaluates to zero.
1640 @end table
1641 @end ifset
1642 @c man end
1643
1644 @ifset TIC6X
1645
1646 @ifclear man
1647 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1648 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1649 @end ifclear
1650
1651 @ifset man
1652 @c man begin OPTIONS
1653 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1654 TMS320C6000 processor.
1655 @c man end
1656 @c man begin INCLUDE
1657 @include c-tic6x.texi
1658 @c ended inside the included file
1659 @end ifset
1660
1661 @end ifset
1662
1663 @ifset TILEGX
1664
1665 @ifclear man
1666 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1667 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1668 @end ifclear
1669
1670 @ifset man
1671 @c man begin OPTIONS
1672 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1673 processor.
1674 @c man end
1675 @c man begin INCLUDE
1676 @include c-tilegx.texi
1677 @c ended inside the included file
1678 @end ifset
1679
1680 @end ifset
1681
1682 @ifset VISIUM
1683
1684 @ifclear man
1685 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1686 for a Visium processor.
1687 @end ifclear
1688
1689 @ifset man
1690 @c man begin OPTIONS
1691 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1692 processor.
1693 @c man end
1694 @c man begin INCLUDE
1695 @include c-visium.texi
1696 @c ended inside the included file
1697 @end ifset
1698
1699 @end ifset
1700
1701 @ifset XTENSA
1702
1703 @ifclear man
1704 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1705 for an Xtensa processor.
1706 @end ifclear
1707
1708 @ifset man
1709 @c man begin OPTIONS
1710 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1711 Xtensa processor.
1712 @c man end
1713 @c man begin INCLUDE
1714 @include c-xtensa.texi
1715 @c ended inside the included file
1716 @end ifset
1717
1718 @end ifset
1719
1720 @c man begin OPTIONS
1721
1722 @ifset Z80
1723 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1724 a Z80 family processor.
1725 @table @gcctabopt
1726 @item -z80
1727 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1728 @item -r800
1729 Assemble for R800 processor.
1730 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1731 @itemx -Wnud
1732 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1733 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1734 @itemx -Wnup
1735 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1736 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1737 @itemx -Wud
1738 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1739 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1740 @itemx -Wup
1741 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1742 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1743 @itemx -Fud
1744 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1745 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1746 @itemx -Fup
1747 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1748 @end table
1749 @end ifset
1750
1751 @c man end
1752
1753 @menu
1754 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1755 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1756 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1757 * Command Line:: Command Line
1758 * Input Files:: Input Files
1759 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1760 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1761 @end menu
1762
1763 @node Manual
1764 @section Structure of this Manual
1765
1766 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1767 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1768 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1769 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1770 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1771
1772 @ifclear GENERIC
1773 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1774 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1775 @end ifclear
1776 @ifset GENERIC
1777 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1778 various flavors of the assembler.
1779 @end ifset
1780
1781 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1782 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1783 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1784 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1785 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1786 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1787 particular architecture.
1788 @ifset GENERIC
1789 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1790 machine architecture manual for this information.
1791 @end ifset
1792 @ifclear GENERIC
1793 @ifset H8/300
1794 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1795 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1796 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1797 @end ifset
1798 @ifset SH
1799 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1800 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1801 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1802 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1803 @end ifset
1804 @ifset Z8000
1805 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1806 @end ifset
1807 @end ifclear
1808
1809 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1810 @ignore
1811 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1812 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1813 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1814 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1815 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1816 qualification.
1817
1818 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1819 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1820 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1821 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1822 @end ignore
1823
1824 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1825 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1826 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1827 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1828 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1829 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1830 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1831 @c directives).
1832
1833 @node GNU Assembler
1834 @section The GNU Assembler
1835
1836 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1837
1838 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1839 @ifclear GENERIC
1840 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1841 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1842 @end ifclear
1843 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1844 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1845 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1846 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1847 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1848
1849 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1850 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1851 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1852 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1853 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1854 machine would assemble.
1855 @ifset VAX
1856 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1857 @end ifset
1858 @ifset M680X0
1859 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1860 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1861 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1862 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1863 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1864 @end ifset
1865
1866 @c man end
1867
1868 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1869 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1870 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1871
1872 @node Object Formats
1873 @section Object File Formats
1874
1875 @cindex object file format
1876 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1877 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1878 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1879 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1880 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1881 @ifclear GENERIC
1882 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1883 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1884 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1885 @end ifclear
1886 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1887 @ifset I960
1888 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1889 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1890 @end ifset
1891 @ifset HPPA
1892 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1893 SOM or ELF format object files.
1894 @end ifset
1895 @end ifclear
1896
1897 @node Command Line
1898 @section Command Line
1899
1900 @cindex command line conventions
1901
1902 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1903 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1904 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1905 significant.
1906
1907 @cindex standard input, as input file
1908 @kindex --
1909 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1910 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1911
1912 @cindex options, command line
1913 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1914 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
1915 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
1916 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1917 the letter is important. All options are optional.
1918
1919 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
1920 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1921 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1922 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
1923
1924 @smallexample
1925 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1926 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1927 @end smallexample
1928
1929 @node Input Files
1930 @section Input Files
1931
1932 @cindex input
1933 @cindex source program
1934 @cindex files, input
1935 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1936 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
1937 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1938 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1939
1940 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1941 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
1942 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1943 order specified.
1944
1945 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1946 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1947 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
1948 (The standard input is also a file.)
1949
1950 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1951 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
1952 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1953 is taken to be an input file name.
1954
1955 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1956 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
1957 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1958 to assemble.
1959
1960 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1961 in your command line.
1962
1963 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1964 file.
1965
1966 @c man end
1967
1968 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1969
1970 @cindex input file linenumbers
1971 @cindex line numbers, in input files
1972 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1973 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
1974 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
1975 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
1976
1977 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
1978 to @command{@value{AS}}.
1979
1980 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
1981 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
1982 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
1983 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
1984 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
1985 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
1986
1987 @node Object
1988 @section Output (Object) File
1989
1990 @cindex object file
1991 @cindex output file
1992 @kindex a.out
1993 @kindex .o
1994 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
1995 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
1996 is the object file. Its default name is
1997 @ifclear BOUT
1998 @code{a.out}.
1999 @end ifclear
2000 @ifset BOUT
2001 @ifset GENERIC
2002 @code{a.out}, or
2003 @end ifset
2004 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
2005 @end ifset
2006 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
2007 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
2008 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
2009 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
2010 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
2011
2012 @cindex linker
2013 @kindex ld
2014 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
2015 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
2016 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
2017 information for the debugger.
2018
2019 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
2020 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
2021
2022 @node Errors
2023 @section Error and Warning Messages
2024
2025 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2026
2027 @cindex error messages
2028 @cindex warning messages
2029 @cindex messages from assembler
2030 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2031 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
2032 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
2033 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2034 grave problem that stops the assembly.
2035
2036 @c man end
2037
2038 @cindex format of warning messages
2039 Warning messages have the format
2040
2041 @smallexample
2042 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2043 @end smallexample
2044
2045 @noindent
2046 @cindex line numbers, in warnings/errors
2047 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If a logical file name has been given
2048 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name of
2049 the current input file is used. If a logical line number was given
2050 @ifset GENERIC
2051 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2052 @end ifset
2053 then it is used to calculate the number printed,
2054 otherwise the actual line in the current source file is printed. The
2055 message text is intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix
2056 tradition).
2057
2058 @cindex format of error messages
2059 Error messages have the format
2060 @smallexample
2061 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2062 @end smallexample
2063 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2064 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2065 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2066
2067 @node Invoking
2068 @chapter Command-Line Options
2069
2070 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
2071 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2072 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2073 for options specific
2074 @ifclear GENERIC
2075 to the @value{TARGET} target.
2076 @end ifclear
2077 @ifset GENERIC
2078 to particular machine architectures.
2079 @end ifset
2080
2081 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2082
2083 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2084 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2085 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2086 by commas. For example:
2087
2088 @smallexample
2089 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2090 @end smallexample
2091
2092 @noindent
2093 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2094 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2095 local symbols in the symbol table).
2096
2097 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2098 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2099 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2100 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2101 assembler.)
2102
2103 @c man end
2104
2105 @menu
2106 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2107 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2108 * D:: -D for compatibility
2109 * f:: -f to work faster
2110 * I:: -I for .include search path
2111 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2112 * K:: -K for compatibility
2113 @end ifclear
2114 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2115 * K:: -K for difference tables
2116 @end ifset
2117
2118 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2119 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2120 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2121 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2122 * o:: -o to name the object file
2123 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2124 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2125 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2126 * v:: -v to announce version
2127 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2128 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2129 @end menu
2130
2131 @node a
2132 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2133
2134 @kindex -a
2135 @kindex -ac
2136 @kindex -ad
2137 @kindex -ag
2138 @kindex -ah
2139 @kindex -al
2140 @kindex -an
2141 @kindex -as
2142 @cindex listings, enabling
2143 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2144
2145 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2146 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2147 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2148 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2149 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2150 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2151 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2152 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2153 also.
2154
2155 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2156 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2157
2158 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2159 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2160 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2161 omitted from the listing.
2162
2163 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2164 listing.
2165
2166 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2167 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2168 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2169 @code{.sbttl}.
2170 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2171 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2172 listing-control directives have no effect.
2173
2174 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2175 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2176
2177 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2178 because it
2179 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2180 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2181 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2182 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2183 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2184
2185 @node alternate
2186 @section @option{--alternate}
2187
2188 @kindex --alternate
2189 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2190
2191 @node D
2192 @section @option{-D}
2193
2194 @kindex -D
2195 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2196 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2197 @command{@value{AS}}.
2198
2199 @node f
2200 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2201
2202 @kindex -f
2203 @cindex trusted compiler
2204 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2205 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2206 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2207 and comment preprocessing on
2208 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2209 ,Preprocessing}.
2210
2211 @quotation
2212 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2213 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2214 not work correctly.
2215 @end quotation
2216
2217 @node I
2218 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2219
2220 @kindex -I @var{path}
2221 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2222 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2223 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2224 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2225 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2226 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2227 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2228 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2229 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2230 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2231
2232 @node K
2233 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2234
2235 @kindex -K
2236 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2237 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2238 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2239 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2240 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2241 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2242 alteration on other platforms.
2243 @end ifclear
2244
2245 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2246 @cindex difference tables, warning
2247 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2248 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2249 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2250 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2251 is done.
2252 @end ifset
2253
2254 @node L
2255 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2256
2257 @kindex -L
2258 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2259 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2260 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2261 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2262 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2263 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2264 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2265 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2266
2267 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2268 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2269 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2270
2271 @node listing
2272 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2273
2274 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2275 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2276 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2277 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2278 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2279 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2280 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2281 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2282
2283 @table @gcctabopt
2284 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2285 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2286 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2287 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2288 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2289
2290 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2291 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2292 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2293 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2294 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2295 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2296 switch is used the default is to one.
2297
2298 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2299 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2300 @cindex Width of source line output
2301 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2302 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2303 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2304
2305 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2306 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2307 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2308 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2309 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2310 @end table
2311
2312 @node M
2313 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2314
2315 @kindex -M
2316 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2317 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2318 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2319 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2320 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2321 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2322 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2323 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2324 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2325
2326 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2327 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2328 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2329 individually. These are:
2330
2331 @itemize @bullet
2332 @item global symbols in common section
2333
2334 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2335 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2336 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2337 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2338 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2339
2340 @item complex relocations
2341
2342 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2343 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2344 are not support by other object file formats.
2345
2346 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2347
2348 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2349 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2350 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2351 script.
2352
2353 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2354
2355 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2356 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2357
2358 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2359
2360 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2361 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2362 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2363 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2364 assigned within a linker script.
2365 @end itemize
2366
2367 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2368 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2369 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2370
2371 @itemize @bullet
2372
2373 @item EBCDIC strings
2374
2375 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2376
2377 @item packed binary coded decimal
2378
2379 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2380 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2381
2382 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2383
2384 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2385
2386 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2387
2388 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2389
2390 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2391
2392 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2393 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2394 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2395 these options serve no purpose.
2396
2397 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2398
2399 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2400 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2401 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2402
2403 @item other @code{OPT} options
2404
2405 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2406 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2407
2408 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2409
2410 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2411 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2412
2413 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2414
2415 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2416
2417 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2418
2419 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2420
2421 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2422
2423 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2424
2425 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2426
2427 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2428
2429 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2430
2431 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2432
2433 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2434
2435 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2436
2437 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2438
2439 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2440
2441 @end itemize
2442
2443 @node MD
2444 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2445
2446 @kindex --MD
2447 @cindex dependency tracking
2448 @cindex make rules
2449
2450 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2451 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2452 dependencies of the main source file.
2453
2454 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2455
2456 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2457
2458 @node o
2459 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2460
2461 @kindex -o
2462 @cindex naming object file
2463 @cindex object file name
2464 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2465 default it has the name
2466 @ifset GENERIC
2467 @ifset I960
2468 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2469 @end ifset
2470 @ifclear I960
2471 @file{a.out}.
2472 @end ifclear
2473 @end ifset
2474 @ifclear GENERIC
2475 @ifset I960
2476 @file{b.out}.
2477 @end ifset
2478 @ifclear I960
2479 @file{a.out}.
2480 @end ifclear
2481 @end ifclear
2482 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2483 object file a different name.
2484
2485 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2486 existing file of the same name.
2487
2488 @node R
2489 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2490
2491 @kindex -R
2492 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2493 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2494 @cindex joining text and data sections
2495 @cindex merging text and data sections
2496 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2497 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2498 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2499 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2500 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2501 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2502
2503 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2504 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2505 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2506 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2507
2508 @ifset COFF-ELF
2509 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2510 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2511 @samp{.data}.
2512 @end ifset
2513
2514 @ifset HPPA
2515 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2516 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2517 @end ifset
2518
2519 @node statistics
2520 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2521
2522 @kindex --statistics
2523 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2524 @cindex time, total for assembly
2525 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2526 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2527 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2528 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2529 seconds).
2530
2531 @node traditional-format
2532 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2533
2534 @kindex --traditional-format
2535 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2536 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2537 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2538
2539 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2540 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2541
2542 @node v
2543 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2544
2545 @kindex -v
2546 @kindex -version
2547 @cindex assembler version
2548 @cindex version of assembler
2549 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2550 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2551 command line.
2552
2553 @node W
2554 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2555
2556 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2557 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2558 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2559 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2560
2561 @kindex -W
2562 @kindex --no-warn
2563 @cindex suppressing warnings
2564 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2565 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2566 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2567 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2568 are still reported.
2569
2570 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2571 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2572 @cindex warnings, causing error
2573 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2574 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2575
2576 @kindex --warn
2577 @cindex warnings, switching on
2578 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2579 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2580
2581 @node Z
2582 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2583 @cindex object file, after errors
2584 @cindex errors, continuing after
2585 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2586 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2587 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2588 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2589 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2590 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2591
2592 @node Syntax
2593 @chapter Syntax
2594
2595 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2596 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2597 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2598 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2599 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2600 @ifclear VAX
2601 assembler.
2602 @end ifclear
2603 @ifset VAX
2604 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2605 @end ifset
2606
2607 @menu
2608 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2609 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2610 * Comments:: Comments
2611 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2612 * Statements:: Statements
2613 * Constants:: Constants
2614 @end menu
2615
2616 @node Preprocessing
2617 @section Preprocessing
2618
2619 @cindex preprocessing
2620 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2621 @itemize @bullet
2622 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2623 @item
2624 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2625 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2626 a single space.
2627
2628 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2629 @item
2630 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2631 appropriate number of newlines.
2632
2633 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2634 @item
2635 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2636 @end itemize
2637
2638 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2639 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2640 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2641 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2642 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2643 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2644 Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}.
2645
2646 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2647 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2648 preprocessed.
2649
2650 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2651 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2652 @kindex #NO_APP
2653 @kindex #APP
2654 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2655 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2656 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2657 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2658 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2659 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2660 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2661 and whitespace.
2662
2663 @node Whitespace
2664 @section Whitespace
2665
2666 @cindex whitespace
2667 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2668 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2669 people to read. Unless within character constants
2670 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2671 as exactly one space.
2672
2673 @node Comments
2674 @section Comments
2675
2676 @cindex comments
2677 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2678 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2679
2680 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2681 This means you may not nest these comments.
2682
2683 @smallexample
2684 /*
2685 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2686 is to use this sort of comment.
2687 */
2688
2689 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2690 @end smallexample
2691
2692 @cindex line comment character
2693 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2694 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2695 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2696 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2697 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2698 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2699 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2700 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2701
2702 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2703 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2704 to specify logical line numbers:
2705
2706 @kindex #
2707 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2708 @cindex logical line numbers
2709 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2710 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2711 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2712 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2713 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2714
2715 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2716 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2717
2718 @smallexample
2719 # This is an ordinary comment.
2720 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2721 # This is logical line # 36.
2722 @end smallexample
2723 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2724 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2725
2726 @node Symbol Intro
2727 @section Symbols
2728
2729 @cindex characters used in symbols
2730 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2731 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2732 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2733 @samp{_.$}.
2734 @end ifclear
2735 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2736 @ifclear GENERIC
2737 @ifset H8
2738 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2739 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2740 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2741 symbol names.)
2742 @end ifset
2743 @end ifclear
2744 @end ifset
2745 @ifset GENERIC
2746 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2747 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2748 @end ifset
2749 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2750 There is no length limit; all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2751 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2752 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2753 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2754
2755 Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote @code{"} characters. In such
2756 cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character. If a double
2757 quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceeded by a
2758 backslash @code{\} character.
2759 @cindex length of symbols
2760
2761 @node Statements
2762 @section Statements
2763
2764 @cindex statements, structure of
2765 @cindex line separator character
2766 @cindex statement separator character
2767
2768 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2769 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2770 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2771 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2772 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2773 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2774 exception: they do not end statements.
2775
2776 @cindex newline, required at file end
2777 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2778 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2779 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2780
2781 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2782
2783 @cindex instructions and directives
2784 @cindex directives and instructions
2785 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2786 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2787 @c 13feb91.
2788 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2789 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2790 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2791 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2792 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2793 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2794 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2795 @ifset GENERIC
2796 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2797 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2798 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2799 language.@refill
2800 @end ifset
2801
2802 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2803 @cindex label (@code{:})
2804 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2805 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2806 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2807
2808 @ifset HPPA
2809 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2810 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2811 only one label may be defined on each line.
2812 @end ifset
2813
2814 @smallexample
2815 label: .directive followed by something
2816 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2817 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2818 @end smallexample
2819
2820 @node Constants
2821 @section Constants
2822
2823 @cindex constants
2824 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2825 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2826 @smallexample
2827 @group
2828 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2829 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2830 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2831 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2832 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2833 @end group
2834 @end smallexample
2835
2836 @menu
2837 * Characters:: Character Constants
2838 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2839 @end menu
2840
2841 @node Characters
2842 @subsection Character Constants
2843
2844 @cindex character constants
2845 @cindex constants, character
2846 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2847 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2848 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2849 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2850 used in arithmetic expressions.
2851
2852 @menu
2853 * Strings:: Strings
2854 * Chars:: Characters
2855 @end menu
2856
2857 @node Strings
2858 @subsubsection Strings
2859
2860 @cindex string constants
2861 @cindex constants, string
2862 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2863 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2864 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2865 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2866 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2867 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2868 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2869 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2870
2871 @cindex escape codes, character
2872 @cindex character escape codes
2873 @table @kbd
2874 @c @item \a
2875 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2876 @c
2877 @cindex @code{\b} (backspace character)
2878 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2879 @item \b
2880 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2881
2882 @c @item \e
2883 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2884 @c
2885 @cindex @code{\f} (formfeed character)
2886 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2887 @item \f
2888 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2889
2890 @cindex @code{\n} (newline character)
2891 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2892 @item \n
2893 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2894
2895 @c @item \p
2896 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2897 @c
2898 @cindex @code{\r} (carriage return character)
2899 @cindex carriage return (@code{\r})
2900 @item \r
2901 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2902
2903 @c @item \s
2904 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
2905 @c other assemblers.
2906 @c
2907 @cindex @code{\t} (tab)
2908 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
2909 @item \t
2910 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2911
2912 @c @item \v
2913 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2914 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2915 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2916 @c
2917 @cindex @code{\@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2918 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2919 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2920 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2921 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2922 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2923
2924 @cindex @code{\@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2925 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2926 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2927 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
2928 lower case @code{x} works.
2929
2930 @cindex @code{\\} (@samp{\} character)
2931 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2932 @item \\
2933 Represents one @samp{\} character.
2934
2935 @c @item \'
2936 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
2937 @c This is needed in single character literals
2938 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
2939 @c a @samp{'}.
2940 @c
2941 @cindex @code{\"} (doublequote character)
2942 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
2943 @item \"
2944 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
2945 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
2946
2947 @item \ @var{anything-else}
2948 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
2949 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
2950 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
2951 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
2952 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
2953 code and warns you of the fact.
2954 @end table
2955
2956 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
2957 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
2958 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
2959 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
2960 sequence.
2961
2962 @node Chars
2963 @subsubsection Characters
2964
2965 @cindex single character constant
2966 @cindex character, single
2967 @cindex constant, single character
2968 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
2969 followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as
2970 to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you
2971 must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
2972 @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
2973 grave accent. A newline
2974 @ifclear GENERIC
2975 @ifclear abnormal-separator
2976 (or semicolon @samp{;})
2977 @end ifclear
2978 @ifset abnormal-separator
2979 @ifset H8
2980 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
2981 Renesas SH)
2982 @end ifset
2983 @end ifset
2984 @end ifclear
2985 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
2986 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
2987 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
2988 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
2989 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
2990
2991 @node Numbers
2992 @subsection Number Constants
2993
2994 @cindex constants, number
2995 @cindex number constants
2996 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
2997 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
2998 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
2999 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
3000 are floating point numbers, described below.
3001
3002 @menu
3003 * Integers:: Integers
3004 * Bignums:: Bignums
3005 * Flonums:: Flonums
3006 @ifclear GENERIC
3007 @ifset I960
3008 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
3009 @end ifset
3010 @end ifclear
3011 @end menu
3012
3013 @node Integers
3014 @subsubsection Integers
3015 @cindex integers
3016 @cindex constants, integer
3017
3018 @cindex binary integers
3019 @cindex integers, binary
3020 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
3021 the binary digits @samp{01}.
3022
3023 @cindex octal integers
3024 @cindex integers, octal
3025 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
3026 digits (@samp{01234567}).
3027
3028 @cindex decimal integers
3029 @cindex integers, decimal
3030 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3031 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3032
3033 @cindex hexadecimal integers
3034 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
3035 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3036 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3037
3038 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
3039 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3040 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3041
3042 @node Bignums
3043 @subsubsection Bignums
3044
3045 @cindex bignums
3046 @cindex constants, bignum
3047 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3048 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3049 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
3050 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3051
3052 @node Flonums
3053 @subsubsection Flonums
3054 @cindex flonums
3055 @cindex floating point numbers
3056 @cindex constants, floating point
3057
3058 @cindex precision, floating point
3059 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
3060 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3061 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3062 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
3063 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3064 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3065
3066 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3067 @itemize @bullet
3068 @item
3069 The digit @samp{0}.
3070 @ifset HPPA
3071 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3072 @end ifset
3073
3074 @item
3075 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3076 @ifset GENERIC
3077 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3078 @ignore
3079 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3080 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
3081 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3082 @end ignore
3083
3084 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
3085 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
3086 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3087
3088 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3089 (in upper or lower case).
3090
3091 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
3092 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3093
3094 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3095 @end ifset
3096 @ifclear GENERIC
3097 @ifset ARC
3098 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3099 @end ifset
3100 @ifset H8
3101 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3102 @end ifset
3103 @ifset HPPA
3104 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3105 @end ifset
3106 @ifset I960
3107 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3108 @end ifset
3109 @end ifclear
3110
3111 @item
3112 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3113
3114 @item
3115 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3116
3117 @item
3118 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3119 or more decimal digits.
3120
3121 @item
3122 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3123
3124 @itemize @bullet
3125 @item
3126 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3127 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3128 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3129 @item
3130 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3131 @item
3132 One or more decimal digits.
3133 @end itemize
3134
3135 @end itemize
3136
3137 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3138 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3139
3140 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3141 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3142 @command{@value{AS}}.
3143
3144 @ifclear GENERIC
3145 @ifset I960
3146 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
3147 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
3148 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
3149 @node Bit Fields
3150 @subsubsection Bit Fields
3151
3152 @cindex bit fields
3153 @cindex constants, bit field
3154 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
3155 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
3156 @example
3157 @var{mask}:@var{value}
3158 @end example
3159 @noindent
3160 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
3161 @var{value}.
3162
3163 The resulting number is then packed
3164 @ifset GENERIC
3165 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3166 (in host-dependent byte order)
3167 @end ifset
3168 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3169 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3170 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3171 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3172 least significant digits.@refill
3173
3174 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3175 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3176 @end ifset
3177 @end ifclear
3178
3179 @node Sections
3180 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3181 @cindex sections
3182 @cindex relocation
3183
3184 @menu
3185 * Secs Background:: Background
3186 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3187 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3188 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3189 * bss:: bss Section
3190 @end menu
3191
3192 @node Secs Background
3193 @section Background
3194
3195 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3196 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3197 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3198
3199 @cindex linker, and assembler
3200 @cindex assembler, and linker
3201 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3202 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3203 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3204 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3205 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3206 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3207 sections.
3208
3209 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3210 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3211 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3212 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3213 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3214 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3215 the proper run-time addresses.
3216 @ifset H8
3217 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3218 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3219 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3220 @end ifset
3221
3222 @cindex standard assembler sections
3223 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3224 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3225 @dfn{bss} sections.
3226
3227 @ifset COFF-ELF
3228 @ifset GENERIC
3229 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3230 @end ifset
3231 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3232 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3233 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3234 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3235 @end ifset
3236
3237 @ifset HPPA
3238 @ifset GENERIC
3239 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3240 @end ifset
3241 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3242 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3243 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3244 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3245 assembler directives.
3246
3247 @ifset SOM
3248 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3249 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3250 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3251 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3252 @end ifset
3253 @end ifset
3254
3255 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3256 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3257
3258 @ifset HPPA
3259 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3260 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3261 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3262 @end ifset
3263
3264 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3265 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3266 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3267 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3268 file is mentioned:
3269 @itemize @bullet
3270 @item
3271 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3272 an address?
3273 @item
3274 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3275 @item
3276 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3277 @display
3278 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3279 @end display
3280 @item
3281 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3282 @end itemize
3283
3284 @cindex addresses, format of
3285 @cindex section-relative addressing
3286 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3287 @display
3288 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3289 @end display
3290 @noindent
3291 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3292 nature.
3293 @ifset SOM
3294 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3295 symbol-relative instead.)
3296 @end ifset
3297
3298 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3299 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3300
3301 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3302 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3303 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3304 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3305 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3306 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3307 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3308 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3309 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3310
3311 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3312 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3313 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3314 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3315 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3316 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3317 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3318
3319 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3320 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3321 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3322 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3323 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3324 data and bss sections.
3325
3326 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3327 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3328
3329 @node Ld Sections
3330 @section Linker Sections
3331 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3332
3333 @table @strong
3334
3335 @ifset COFF-ELF
3336 @cindex named sections
3337 @cindex sections, named
3338 @item named sections
3339 @end ifset
3340 @ifset aout-bout
3341 @cindex text section
3342 @cindex data section
3343 @itemx text section
3344 @itemx data section
3345 @end ifset
3346 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3347 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3348 true of another.
3349 @c @ifset aout-bout
3350 When the program is running, however, it is
3351 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3352 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3353 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3354 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3355 in the data section.
3356 @c @end ifset
3357
3358 @cindex bss section
3359 @item bss section
3360 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3361 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3362 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3363 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3364 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3365 those explicit zeros from object files.
3366
3367 @cindex absolute section
3368 @item absolute section
3369 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3370 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3371 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3372 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3373
3374 @cindex undefined section
3375 @item undefined section
3376 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3377 the preceding sections.
3378 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3379 @end table
3380
3381 @cindex relocation example
3382 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3383 @ifset COFF-ELF
3384 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3385 @end ifset
3386 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3387
3388 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3389 @ifnottex
3390 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3391 @smallexample
3392 +-----+----+--+
3393 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3394 +-----+----+--+
3395
3396 text data bss
3397 seg. seg. seg.
3398
3399 +---+---+---+
3400 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3401 +---+---+---+
3402
3403 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3404 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3405 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3406
3407 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3408 @end smallexample
3409 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3410 @end ifnottex
3411 @need 5000
3412 @tex
3413 \bigskip
3414 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3415 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3416 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3417
3418 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3419 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3420 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3421
3422 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3423 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3424 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3425 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3426 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3427
3428 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3429 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3430
3431 @end tex
3432 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3433
3434 @node As Sections
3435 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3436
3437 @cindex internal assembler sections
3438 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3439 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3440 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3441 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3442 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3443 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3444 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3445 section-relative address.
3446
3447 @table @b
3448 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3449 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3450 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3451 bug in the assembler.
3452
3453 @cindex expr (internal section)
3454 @item expr section
3455 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3456 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3457 it in the expr section.
3458 @c FIXME item debug
3459 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3460 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3461 @c FIXME item register
3462 @end table
3463
3464 @node Sub-Sections
3465 @section Sub-Sections
3466
3467 @cindex numbered subsections
3468 @cindex grouping data
3469 @ifset aout-bout
3470 Assembled bytes
3471 @ifset COFF-ELF
3472 conventionally
3473 @end ifset
3474 fall into two sections: text and data.
3475 @end ifset
3476 You may have separate groups of
3477 @ifset GENERIC
3478 data in named sections
3479 @end ifset
3480 @ifclear GENERIC
3481 @ifclear aout-bout
3482 data in named sections
3483 @end ifclear
3484 @ifset aout-bout
3485 text or data
3486 @end ifset
3487 @end ifclear
3488 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3489 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3490 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3491 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3492 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3493 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3494 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3495 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3496 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3497 constants being output.
3498
3499 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3500 goes in subsection number zero.
3501
3502 @ifset GENERIC
3503 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3504 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3505 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3506 @end ifset
3507 @ifclear GENERIC
3508 @ifset H8
3509 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3510 boundary (two bytes).
3511 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3512 @end ifset
3513 @ifset I960
3514 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3515 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3516 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3517 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3518 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3519 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3520 @end ifset
3521 @end ifclear
3522
3523 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3524 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3525 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3526 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3527 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3528 data subsections as a data section.
3529
3530 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3531 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3532 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3533 @ifset COFF
3534 @ifset GENERIC
3535 When generating COFF output, you
3536 @end ifset
3537 @ifclear GENERIC
3538 You
3539 @end ifclear
3540 can also use an extra subsection
3541 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3542 @var{expression}}.
3543 @end ifset
3544 @ifset ELF
3545 @ifset GENERIC
3546 When generating ELF output, you
3547 @end ifset
3548 @ifclear GENERIC
3549 You
3550 @end ifclear
3551 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3552 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3553 @end ifset
3554 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3555 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3556 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3557 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3558 @smallexample
3559 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3560 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3561 .text 1
3562 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3563 .data 0
3564 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3565 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3566 .text 0
3567 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3568 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3569 @end smallexample
3570
3571 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3572 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3573 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3574 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3575 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3576 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3577 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3578
3579 @node bss
3580 @section bss Section
3581
3582 @cindex bss section
3583 @cindex common variable storage
3584 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3585 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3586 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3587 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3588 section are zeroed bytes.
3589
3590 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3591 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3592
3593 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3594 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3595
3596 @ifset GENERIC
3597 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3598 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3599 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3600 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3601 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3602 @end ifset
3603
3604 @node Symbols
3605 @chapter Symbols
3606
3607 @cindex symbols
3608 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3609 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3610 to debug.
3611
3612 @quotation
3613 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3614 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3615 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3616 @end quotation
3617
3618 @menu
3619 * Labels:: Labels
3620 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3621 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3622 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3623 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3624 @end menu
3625
3626 @node Labels
3627 @section Labels
3628
3629 @cindex labels
3630 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3631 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3632 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3633 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3634 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3635 definitions.
3636
3637 @ifset HPPA
3638 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3639 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3640 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3641 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3642 @end ifset
3643
3644 @node Setting Symbols
3645 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3646
3647 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3648 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3649 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3650 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3651 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3652 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3653 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3654 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3655
3656 @ifset Blackfin
3657 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3658 @end ifset
3659
3660 @node Symbol Names
3661 @section Symbol Names
3662
3663 @cindex symbol names
3664 @cindex names, symbol
3665 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3666 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3667 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3668 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3669 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3670 particular target machine), and underscores.
3671 @end ifclear
3672 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3673 @ifset H8
3674 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3675 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3676 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3677 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3678 @end ifset
3679 @end ifset
3680
3681 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3682 than @code{Foo}.
3683
3684 Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for
3685 Local Labels. See below.
3686
3687 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3688 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3689 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3690 currently supported.
3691
3692 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3693 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3694 in a program.
3695
3696 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3697
3698 @cindex local symbol names
3699 @cindex symbol names, local
3700 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3701 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3702 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3703 set of local label prefixes.
3704 @ifset HPPA
3705 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3706 @end ifset
3707
3708 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3709 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3710 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3711 to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3712
3713 @subheading Local Labels
3714
3715 @cindex local labels
3716 @cindex temporary symbol names
3717 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3718 Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and
3719 programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to
3720 be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
3721 referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of
3722 the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any non-negative integer).
3723 To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write
3724 @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when you defined the label. To refer
3725 to the next definition of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}. The @samp{b}
3726 stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
3727
3728 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3729 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3730 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3731 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3732 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3733 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3734 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3735
3736 Here is an example:
3737
3738 @smallexample
3739 1: branch 1f
3740 2: branch 1b
3741 1: branch 2f
3742 2: branch 1b
3743 @end smallexample
3744
3745 Which is the equivalent of:
3746
3747 @smallexample
3748 label_1: branch label_3
3749 label_2: branch label_1
3750 label_3: branch label_4
3751 label_4: branch label_3
3752 @end smallexample
3753
3754 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3755 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3756 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3757 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3758 these parts:
3759
3760 @table @code
3761 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3762 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3763 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3764 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3765 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3766 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3767 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3768 you may use them in debugging.
3769
3770 @item @var{number}
3771 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3772 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3773
3774 @item @kbd{C-B}
3775 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3776 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3777
3778 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3779 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3780 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3781 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3782 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3783 @end table
3784
3785 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3786 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3787
3788 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3789 @cindex dollar local symbols
3790
3791 On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
3792 local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
3793 become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain
3794 valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels,
3795 by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
3796 by another occurrence of the same local label.
3797
3798 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3799 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3800 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3801
3802 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3803 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3804 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3805 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3806
3807 @node Dot
3808 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3809
3810 @cindex dot (symbol)
3811 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3812 @cindex current address
3813 @cindex location counter
3814 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3815 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3816 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3817 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3818 directive.
3819 @ifclear no-space-dir
3820 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3821 @samp{.space 4}.
3822 @end ifclear
3823
3824 @node Symbol Attributes
3825 @section Symbol Attributes
3826
3827 @cindex symbol attributes
3828 @cindex attributes, symbol
3829 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3830 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3831 attributes.
3832 @ifset INTERNALS
3833 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3834 @end ifset
3835
3836 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3837 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3838 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3839 would want.
3840
3841 @menu
3842 * Symbol Value:: Value
3843 * Symbol Type:: Type
3844 @ifset aout-bout
3845 @ifset GENERIC
3846 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3847 @end ifset
3848 @ifclear GENERIC
3849 @ifclear BOUT
3850 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3851 @end ifclear
3852 @ifset BOUT
3853 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3854 @end ifset
3855 @end ifclear
3856 @end ifset
3857 @ifset COFF
3858 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3859 @end ifset
3860 @ifset SOM
3861 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3862 @end ifset
3863 @end menu
3864
3865 @node Symbol Value
3866 @subsection Value
3867
3868 @cindex value of a symbol
3869 @cindex symbol value
3870 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3871 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3872 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3873 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3874 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3875 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3876 called absolute.
3877
3878 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3879 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3880 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3881 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3882 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3883 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3884 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3885 allocated storage.
3886
3887 @node Symbol Type
3888 @subsection Type
3889
3890 @cindex type of a symbol
3891 @cindex symbol type
3892 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3893 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3894 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3895 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3896
3897 @ifset aout-bout
3898 @ifclear GENERIC
3899 @ifset BOUT
3900 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
3901 @c better if it were available outside examples.
3902 @need 1000
3903 @node a.out Symbols
3904 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3905
3906 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3907 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3908 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3909 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3910 @code{b.out}.
3911
3912 @end ifset
3913 @ifclear BOUT
3914 @node a.out Symbols
3915 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3916
3917 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3918 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3919
3920 @end ifclear
3921 @end ifclear
3922 @ifset GENERIC
3923 @node a.out Symbols
3924 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3925
3926 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3927 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3928
3929 @end ifset
3930 @menu
3931 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
3932 * Symbol Other:: Other
3933 @end menu
3934
3935 @node Symbol Desc
3936 @subsubsection Descriptor
3937
3938 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3939 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
3940 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3941 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
3942 @command{@value{AS}}.
3943
3944 @node Symbol Other
3945 @subsubsection Other
3946
3947 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3948 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3949 @end ifset
3950
3951 @ifset COFF
3952 @node COFF Symbols
3953 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3954
3955 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
3956 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3957
3958 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3959 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3960 @code{.endef} directives.
3961
3962 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
3963
3964 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3965 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3966 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3967
3968 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3969
3970 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3971 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3972 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
3973 table information for COFF.
3974 @end ifset
3975
3976 @ifset SOM
3977 @node SOM Symbols
3978 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
3979
3980 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
3981 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
3982
3983 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
3984 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
3985
3986 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
3987 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
3988 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
3989 @end ifset
3990
3991 @node Expressions
3992 @chapter Expressions
3993
3994 @cindex expressions
3995 @cindex addresses
3996 @cindex numeric values
3997 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
3998 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
3999
4000 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
4001 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
4002 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
4003 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
4004 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
4005 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
4006
4007 @menu
4008 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
4009 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
4010 @end menu
4011
4012 @node Empty Exprs
4013 @section Empty Expressions
4014
4015 @cindex empty expressions
4016 @cindex expressions, empty
4017 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
4018 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
4019 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
4020 is compatible with other assemblers.
4021
4022 @node Integer Exprs
4023 @section Integer Expressions
4024
4025 @cindex integer expressions
4026 @cindex expressions, integer
4027 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
4028 by @emph{operators}.
4029
4030 @menu
4031 * Arguments:: Arguments
4032 * Operators:: Operators
4033 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
4034 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
4035 @end menu
4036
4037 @node Arguments
4038 @subsection Arguments
4039
4040 @cindex expression arguments
4041 @cindex arguments in expressions
4042 @cindex operands in expressions
4043 @cindex arithmetic operands
4044 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
4045 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
4046 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4047 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4048 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4049 instruction operands.
4050
4051 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4052 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4053 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4054 integer.
4055
4056 Numbers are usually integers.
4057
4058 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
4059 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4060 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
4061 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4062 assemblers.
4063
4064 @cindex subexpressions
4065 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4066 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4067 operator followed by an argument.
4068
4069 @node Operators
4070 @subsection Operators
4071
4072 @cindex operators, in expressions
4073 @cindex arithmetic functions
4074 @cindex functions, in expressions
4075 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4076 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4077 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4078 whitespace.
4079
4080 @node Prefix Ops
4081 @subsection Prefix Operator
4082
4083 @cindex prefix operators
4084 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4085 one argument, which must be absolute.
4086
4087 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4088 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4089 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4090 @tex
4091 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4092 @end tex
4093
4094 @table @code
4095 @item -
4096 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4097 @item ~
4098 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4099 @end table
4100
4101 @tex
4102 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4103 @end tex
4104
4105 @node Infix Ops
4106 @subsection Infix Operators
4107
4108 @cindex infix operators
4109 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4110 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4111 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4112 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4113 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4114
4115 @enumerate
4116 @cindex operator precedence
4117 @cindex precedence of operators
4118
4119 @item
4120 Highest Precedence
4121
4122 @table @code
4123 @item *
4124 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4125
4126 @item /
4127 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4128
4129 @item %
4130 @dfn{Remainder}.
4131
4132 @item <<
4133 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4134
4135 @item >>
4136 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4137 @end table
4138
4139 @item
4140 Intermediate precedence
4141
4142 @table @code
4143 @item |
4144
4145 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4146
4147 @item &
4148 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4149
4150 @item ^
4151 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4152
4153 @item !
4154 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4155 @end table
4156
4157 @item
4158 Low Precedence
4159
4160 @table @code
4161 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4162 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4163 @cindex arguments for addition
4164 @item +
4165 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4166 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4167 sections.
4168
4169 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4170 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4171 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4172 @item -
4173 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4174 result has the section of the left argument.
4175 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4176 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4177 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4178
4179 @cindex comparison expressions
4180 @cindex expressions, comparison
4181 @item ==
4182 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4183 @item <>
4184 @itemx !=
4185 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4186 @item <
4187 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4188 @item >
4189 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4190 @item >=
4191 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4192 @item <=
4193 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4194
4195 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4196 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4197 perform signed comparisons.
4198 @end table
4199
4200 @item Lowest Precedence
4201
4202 @table @code
4203 @item &&
4204 @dfn{Logical And}.
4205
4206 @item ||
4207 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4208
4209 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4210 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4211 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4212 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4213
4214 @end table
4215 @end enumerate
4216
4217 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4218 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4219
4220 @node Pseudo Ops
4221 @chapter Assembler Directives
4222
4223 @cindex directives, machine independent
4224 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4225 @cindex machine independent directives
4226 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4227 The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
4228 in lower case.
4229
4230 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4231 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4232 @ifset GENERIC
4233 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4234 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4235 @end ifset
4236 @ifclear GENERIC
4237 @ifset machine-directives
4238 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4239 @end ifset
4240 @end ifclear
4241
4242 @menu
4243 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4244 @ifset COFF
4245 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4246 @end ifset
4247
4248 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4249 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4250 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4251 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4252 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4253 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
4254 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4255 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4256 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4257 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4258 @ifset COFF
4259 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4260 @end ifset
4261 @ifset aout-bout
4262 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4263 @end ifset
4264 @ifset COFF
4265 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4266 @end ifset
4267
4268 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4269 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4270 * Else:: @code{.else}
4271 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4272 * End:: @code{.end}
4273 @ifset COFF
4274 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4275 @end ifset
4276
4277 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4278 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4279 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4280 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4281 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4282 * Err:: @code{.err}
4283 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4284 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4285 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4286 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4287 * File:: @code{.file}
4288 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4289 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4290 * Func:: @code{.func}
4291 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4292 @ifset ELF
4293 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4294 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4295 @end ifset
4296
4297 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4298 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4299 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4300 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4301 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4302 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4303 @ifset ELF
4304 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4305 @end ifset
4306
4307 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4308 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4309 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4310 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4311 @ifclear no-line-dir
4312 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4313 @end ifclear
4314
4315 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4316 * List:: @code{.list}
4317 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4318 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4319 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4320 @ifset ELF
4321 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4322 @end ifset
4323
4324 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4325 @ignore
4326 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4327 @end ignore
4328
4329 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4330 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4331 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4332 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4333 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4334 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4335 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4336 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4337 @ifset ELF
4338 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4339 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4340 @end ifset
4341
4342 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4343 @ifset ELF
4344 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4345 @end ifset
4346
4347 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4348 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4349 @ifset ELF
4350 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4351 @end ifset
4352
4353 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4354 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4355 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4356 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4357 @ifset COFF
4358 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4359 @end ifset
4360 @ifset COFF-ELF
4361 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4362 @end ifset
4363
4364 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4365 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4366 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4367 @ifset COFF-ELF
4368 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4369 @end ifset
4370 @ifclear no-space-dir
4371 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4372 @end ifclear
4373
4374 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4375 @ifclear no-space-dir
4376 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4377 @end ifclear
4378 @ifset have-stabs
4379 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4380 @end ifset
4381
4382 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4383 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4384 @ifset ELF
4385 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4386 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4387 @end ifset
4388
4389 @ifset COFF
4390 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4391 @end ifset
4392
4393 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4394 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4395 @ifset COFF-ELF
4396 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4397 @end ifset
4398
4399 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4400 @ifset COFF
4401 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4402 @end ifset
4403
4404 @ifset ELF
4405 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4406 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4407 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4408 @end ifset
4409
4410 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4411 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4412 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4413 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4414 @ifclear no-space-dir
4415 * Zero:: @code{.zero @var{size}}
4416 @end ifclear
4417 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4418 @end menu
4419
4420 @node Abort
4421 @section @code{.abort}
4422
4423 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4424 @cindex stopping the assembly
4425 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4426 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4427 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4428 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4429 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4430
4431 @ifset COFF
4432 @node ABORT (COFF)
4433 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4434
4435 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4436 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4437 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4438
4439 @ifset BOUT
4440 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4441 but ignores it.
4442 @end ifset
4443 @end ifset
4444
4445 @node Align
4446 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4447
4448 @cindex padding the location counter
4449 @cindex @code{align} directive
4450 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4451 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4452 required, as described below.
4453
4454 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4455 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4456 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4457 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4458 with no-op instructions.
4459
4460 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4461 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4462 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4463 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4464 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4465 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4466 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4467
4468 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4469 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4470 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4471 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4472 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4473 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4474 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4475
4476 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4477 strongarm, it is the
4478 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4479 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4480 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4481 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4482
4483 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4484 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4485 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4486 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4487 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4488
4489 @node Altmacro
4490 @section @code{.altmacro}
4491 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4492
4493 @ftable @code
4494 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4495 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4496 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4497 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4498 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4499 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4500 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4501
4502 @item String delimiters
4503 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4504 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4505
4506 @table @code
4507 @item '@var{string}'
4508 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4509
4510 @item <@var{string}>
4511 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4512 @end table
4513
4514 @item single-character string escape
4515 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4516 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4517 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4518 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4519
4520 @item Expression results as strings
4521 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4522 and use the result as a string.
4523 @end ftable
4524
4525 @node Ascii
4526 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4527
4528 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4529 @cindex string literals
4530 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4531 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4532 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4533
4534 @node Asciz
4535 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4536
4537 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4538 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4539 @cindex null-terminated strings
4540 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4541 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4542
4543 @node Balign
4544 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4545
4546 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4547 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4548 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4549 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4550 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4551 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4552 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4553
4554 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4555 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4556 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4557 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4558 with no-op instructions.
4559
4560 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4561 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4562 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4563 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4564 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4565 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4566 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4567
4568 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4569 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4570 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4571 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4572 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4573 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4574 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4575 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4576 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4577 undefined.
4578
4579 @node Bundle directives
4580 @section Bundle directives
4581 @subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4582 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4583 @cindex bundle
4584 @cindex instruction bundle
4585 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4586 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4587 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4588 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4589 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4590 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4591 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4592
4593 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4594 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4595 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4596 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4597 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4598 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4599 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4600 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4601 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4602 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4603 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4604
4605 @subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4606 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4607 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4608 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4609 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4610 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4611 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4612 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4613 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4614
4615 @cindex bundle-locked
4616 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4617 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4618 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4619 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4620 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4621 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4622 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4623 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4624 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4625 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4626 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4627 bundle size.
4628
4629 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4630 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4631 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4632 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4633 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4634 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4635
4636 @node Byte
4637 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4638
4639 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4640 @cindex integers, one byte
4641 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4642 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4643
4644 @node CFI directives
4645 @section CFI directives
4646 @subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4647 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4648 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4649 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4650 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4651 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4652 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4653 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4654
4655 On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
4656 by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
4657
4658 @subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4659 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4660 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4661 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4662 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4663 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4664
4665 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4666 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4667
4668 @subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
4669 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4670 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4671 unwind entry previously opened by
4672 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4673
4674 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4675 @cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
4676 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4677 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4678 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4679 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4680 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4681 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4682 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4683 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4684 no personality routine.
4685
4686 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
4687 @cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
4688 @code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
4689 defined in a compact unwinding format.
4690 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4691 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4692
4693 @subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
4694 @cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
4695 @code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
4696 used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the
4697 @code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
4698 in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
4699 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4700 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4701
4702 @subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4703 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4704 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4705 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
4706 argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
4707 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4708 meaning that no LSDA is present.
4709
4710 @subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
4711 @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
4712 switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
4713 Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
4714 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4715 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4716
4717 The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
4718 so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol
4719 referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
4720 in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated
4721 by a section directive.
4722
4723 The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
4724 The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
4725 @code{.p2align} directive.
4726
4727 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4728 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4729 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4730
4731 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4732 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4733 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4734 remains the same.
4735
4736 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4737 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4738 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4739 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4740 CFA address.
4741
4742 @subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4743 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4744 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4745
4746 @subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4747 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4748 CFA.
4749
4750 @subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4751 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4752 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4753 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4754 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4755 code it's annotating.
4756
4757 @subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4758 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4759
4760 @subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4761 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4762 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4763 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4764
4765 @subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4766 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4767
4768 @subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4769 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4770 i.e. no restoration needed.
4771
4772 @subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4773 First save all current rules for all registers by @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4774 then totally screw them up by subsequent @code{.cfi_*} directives and when
4775 everything is hopelessly bad, use @code{.cfi_restore_state} to restore
4776 the previous saved state.
4777
4778 @subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4779 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4780 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4781
4782 @subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4783 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4784
4785 @subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
4786 SPARC register window has been saved.
4787
4788 @subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4789 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4790 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4791 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4792
4793 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4794 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4795 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4796 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4797
4798 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4799 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4800 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4801 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4802 or another register.
4803
4804 @node Comm
4805 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4806
4807 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4808 @cindex symbol, common
4809 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4810 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4811 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4812 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4813 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4814 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4815 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4816 using the largest size.
4817
4818 @ifset COFF-ELF
4819 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4820 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4821 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4822 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4823 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4824 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4825 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4826 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4827 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4828 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4829 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4830 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4831 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4832 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4833 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4834 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4835 @end ifset
4836
4837 @ifset HPPA
4838 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4839 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4840 @end ifset
4841
4842 @node Data
4843 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4844
4845 @cindex @code{data} directive
4846 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4847 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4848 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4849 to zero.
4850
4851 @ifset COFF
4852 @node Def
4853 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
4854
4855 @cindex @code{def} directive
4856 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4857 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
4858 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4859 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4860 @ifset BOUT
4861
4862 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4863 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4864 but ignored.
4865 @end ifset
4866 @end ifset
4867
4868 @ifset aout-bout
4869 @node Desc
4870 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4871
4872 @cindex @code{desc} directive
4873 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4874 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4875 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4876 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4877
4878 @ifset COFF
4879 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4880 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4881 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4882 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4883 @end ifset
4884 @end ifset
4885
4886 @ifset COFF
4887 @node Dim
4888 @section @code{.dim}
4889
4890 @cindex @code{dim} directive
4891 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
4892 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
4893 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
4894 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
4895 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
4896 @ifset BOUT
4897
4898 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
4899 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
4900 ignores it.
4901 @end ifset
4902 @end ifset
4903
4904 @node Double
4905 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4906
4907 @cindex @code{double} directive
4908 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
4909 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4910 assembles floating point numbers.
4911 @ifset GENERIC
4912 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4913 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4914 @end ifset
4915 @ifclear GENERIC
4916 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4917 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
4918 in @sc{ieee} format.
4919 @end ifset
4920 @end ifclear
4921
4922 @node Eject
4923 @section @code{.eject}
4924
4925 @cindex @code{eject} directive
4926 @cindex new page, in listings
4927 @cindex page, in listings
4928 @cindex listing control: new page
4929 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
4930
4931 @node Else
4932 @section @code{.else}
4933
4934 @cindex @code{else} directive
4935 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4936 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
4937 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
4938 was false.
4939
4940 @node Elseif
4941 @section @code{.elseif}
4942
4943 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
4944 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4945 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
4946 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
4947
4948 @node End
4949 @section @code{.end}
4950
4951 @cindex @code{end} directive
4952 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
4953 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
4954
4955 @ifset COFF
4956 @node Endef
4957 @section @code{.endef}
4958
4959 @cindex @code{endef} directive
4960 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
4961 @code{.def}.
4962 @ifset BOUT
4963
4964 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
4965 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
4966 directive but ignores it.
4967 @end ifset
4968 @end ifset
4969
4970 @node Endfunc
4971 @section @code{.endfunc}
4972 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
4973 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
4974
4975 @node Endif
4976 @section @code{.endif}
4977
4978 @cindex @code{endif} directive
4979 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
4980 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
4981 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
4982
4983 @node Equ
4984 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4985
4986 @cindex @code{equ} directive
4987 @cindex assigning values to symbols
4988 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
4989 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
4990 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
4991
4992 @ifset HPPA
4993 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
4994 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
4995 @end ifset
4996
4997 @ifset Z80
4998 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
4999 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
5000 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
5001 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
5002 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
5003 @end ifset
5004
5005 @node Equiv
5006 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5007 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
5008 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
5009 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
5010 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
5011 undefined.
5012
5013 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
5014 @smallexample
5015 .ifdef SYM
5016 .err
5017 .endif
5018 .equ SYM,VAL
5019 @end smallexample
5020 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
5021
5022 @node Eqv
5023 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5024 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
5025 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
5026 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
5027 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
5028 value is taken.
5029
5030 @node Err
5031 @section @code{.err}
5032 @cindex @code{err} directive
5033 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
5034 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
5035 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
5036
5037 @node Error
5038 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
5039 @cindex error directive
5040
5041 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
5042 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
5043 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
5044 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
5045
5046 @smallexample
5047 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
5048 @end smallexample
5049
5050 @node Exitm
5051 @section @code{.exitm}
5052 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
5053
5054 @node Extern
5055 @section @code{.extern}
5056
5057 @cindex @code{extern} directive
5058 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
5059 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
5060 all undefined symbols as external.
5061
5062 @node Fail
5063 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
5064
5065 @cindex @code{fail} directive
5066 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
5067 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
5068 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
5069 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
5070 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
5071
5072 @node File
5073 @section @code{.file}
5074 @cindex @code{file} directive
5075
5076 @ifclear no-file-dir
5077 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
5078 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5079 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
5080
5081 @subheading Default Version
5082
5083 @cindex logical file name
5084 @cindex file name, logical
5085 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5086 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
5087
5088 @smallexample
5089 .file @var{string}
5090 @end smallexample
5091
5092 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
5093 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5094 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
5095 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5096 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5097
5098 @subheading DWARF2 Version
5099 @end ifclear
5100
5101 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5102 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
5103
5104 @smallexample
5105 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5106 @end smallexample
5107
5108 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5109 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5110 literal.
5111
5112 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5113 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5114 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5115 entries will have.
5116
5117 @node Fill
5118 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5119
5120 @cindex @code{fill} directive
5121 @cindex writing patterns in memory
5122 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
5123 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5124 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5125 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5126 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5127 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5128 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5129 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5130 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5131 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5132 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5133 compatible with other people's assemblers.
5134
5135 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5136 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5137 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5138 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5139
5140 @node Float
5141 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5142
5143 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5144 @cindex @code{float} directive
5145 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5146 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5147 @ifset GENERIC
5148 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5149 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5150 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5151 @end ifset
5152 @ifclear GENERIC
5153 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5154 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5155 in @sc{ieee} format.
5156 @end ifset
5157 @end ifclear
5158
5159 @node Func
5160 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5161 @cindex @code{func} directive
5162 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5163 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5164 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5165 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5166 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5167 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5168 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5169 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5170
5171 @node Global
5172 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5173
5174 @cindex @code{global} directive
5175 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5176 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5177 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5178 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5179 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5180 from another file linked into the same program.
5181
5182 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5183 compatibility with other assemblers.
5184
5185 @ifset HPPA
5186 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5187 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5188 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5189 @end ifset
5190
5191 @ifset ELF
5192 @node Gnu_attribute
5193 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5194 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5195
5196 @node Hidden
5197 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5198
5199 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5200 @cindex visibility
5201 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5202 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5203 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5204
5205 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5206 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5207 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5208 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5209 @end ifset
5210
5211 @node hword
5212 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5213
5214 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5215 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5216 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5217 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5218 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5219 a 16 bit number for each.
5220
5221 @ifset GENERIC
5222 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5223 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5224 @end ifset
5225 @ifclear GENERIC
5226 @ifset W32
5227 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5228 @end ifset
5229 @ifset W16
5230 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5231 @end ifset
5232 @end ifclear
5233
5234 @node Ident
5235 @section @code{.ident}
5236
5237 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5238
5239 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5240 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5241 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5242 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5243 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5244 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5245 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5246
5247 @node If
5248 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5249
5250 @cindex conditional assembly
5251 @cindex @code{if} directive
5252 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5253 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5254 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5255 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5256 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5257 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5258 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5259 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5260
5261 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5262 @table @code
5263 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5264 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5265 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5266 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5267 is considered to be undefined.
5268
5269 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5270 @item .ifb @var{text}
5271 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5272
5273 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5274 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5275 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5276 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5277 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5278 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5279 string comparison is case sensitive.
5280
5281 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5282 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5283 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5284
5285 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5286 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5287 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5288
5289 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5290 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5291 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5292 equal to zero.
5293
5294 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5295 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5296 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5297
5298 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5299 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5300 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5301 to zero.
5302
5303 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5304 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5305 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5306
5307 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5308 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5309 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5310 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5311
5312 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5313 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5314 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5315 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5316
5317 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5318 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5319 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5320 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5321 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5322 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5323 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5324
5325 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5326 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5327 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5328 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5329
5330 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5331 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5332 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5333 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5334 @end table
5335
5336 @node Incbin
5337 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5338
5339 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5340 @cindex binary files, including
5341 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5342 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5343 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5344 around @var{file}.
5345
5346 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5347 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5348 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5349 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5350 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5351
5352 @node Include
5353 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5354
5355 @cindex @code{include} directive
5356 @cindex supporting files, including
5357 @cindex files, including
5358 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5359 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5360 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5361 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5362 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5363 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5364 around @var{file}.
5365
5366 @node Int
5367 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5368
5369 @cindex @code{int} directive
5370 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5371 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5372 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5373 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5374 of target the assembly is for.
5375
5376 @ifclear GENERIC
5377 @ifset H8
5378 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5379 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5380 32-bit integers.
5381 @end ifset
5382 @end ifclear
5383
5384 @ifset ELF
5385 @node Internal
5386 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5387
5388 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5389 @cindex visibility
5390 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5391 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5392 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5393
5394 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5395 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5396 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5397 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5398 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5399 @end ifset
5400
5401 @node Irp
5402 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5403
5404 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5405 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5406 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5407 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5408 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5409 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5410 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5411 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5412
5413 For example, assembling
5414
5415 @example
5416 .irp param,1,2,3
5417 move d\param,sp@@-
5418 .endr
5419 @end example
5420
5421 is equivalent to assembling
5422
5423 @example
5424 move d1,sp@@-
5425 move d2,sp@@-
5426 move d3,sp@@-
5427 @end example
5428
5429 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5430
5431 @node Irpc
5432 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5433
5434 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5435 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5436 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5437 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5438 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5439 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5440 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5441 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5442
5443 For example, assembling
5444
5445 @example
5446 .irpc param,123
5447 move d\param,sp@@-
5448 .endr
5449 @end example
5450
5451 is equivalent to assembling
5452
5453 @example
5454 move d1,sp@@-
5455 move d2,sp@@-
5456 move d3,sp@@-
5457 @end example
5458
5459 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5460 at @xref{Macro}.
5461
5462 @node Lcomm
5463 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5464
5465 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5466 @cindex local common symbols
5467 @cindex symbols, local common
5468 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5469 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5470 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5471 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5472 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5473 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5474
5475 @ifset GENERIC
5476 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5477 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5478 @end ifset
5479
5480 @ifset HPPA
5481 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5482 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5483 @end ifset
5484
5485 @node Lflags
5486 @section @code{.lflags}
5487
5488 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5489 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5490 assemblers, but ignores it.
5491
5492 @ifclear no-line-dir
5493 @node Line
5494 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5495
5496 @cindex @code{line} directive
5497 @cindex logical line number
5498 @ifset aout-bout
5499 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5500 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5501 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5502 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5503 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5504 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5505 @end ifset
5506
5507 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5508 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5509 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5510 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5511 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5512
5513 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5514 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5515 debugging.
5516 @end ifclear
5517
5518 @node Linkonce
5519 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5520 @cindex COMDAT
5521 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5522 @cindex common sections
5523 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5524 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5525 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5526 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5527 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5528 unique.
5529
5530 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5531 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5532 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5533
5534 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5535 following strings. For example:
5536 @smallexample
5537 .linkonce same_size
5538 @end smallexample
5539 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5540
5541 @table @code
5542 @item discard
5543 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5544
5545 @item one_only
5546 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5547
5548 @item same_size
5549 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5550
5551 @item same_contents
5552 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5553 @end table
5554
5555 @node List
5556 @section @code{.list}
5557
5558 @cindex @code{list} directive
5559 @cindex listing control, turning on
5560 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5561 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5562 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5563 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5564 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5565
5566 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5567 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5568 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5569
5570 @node Ln
5571 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5572
5573 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5574 @ifclear no-line-dir
5575 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5576 @end ifclear
5577 @ifset no-line-dir
5578 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5579 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5580 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5581 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5582 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5583 @ifset BOUT
5584
5585 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5586 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5587 output format.
5588 @end ifset
5589 @end ifset
5590
5591 @node Loc
5592 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5593 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5594 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5595 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5596 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5597 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5598 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5599 the row is added.
5600
5601 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5602
5603 @table @code
5604 @item basic_block
5605 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5606 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5607
5608 @item prologue_end
5609 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5610 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5611
5612 @item epilogue_begin
5613 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5614 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5615
5616 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5617 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5618 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5619 either 0 or 1.
5620
5621 @item isa @var{value}
5622 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5623 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5624
5625 @item discriminator @var{value}
5626 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5627 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5628
5629 @end table
5630
5631 @node Loc_mark_labels
5632 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5633 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5634 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5635 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5636 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5637 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5638 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5639 this function respectively.
5640
5641 @ifset ELF
5642 @node Local
5643 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5644
5645 @cindex @code{local} directive
5646 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5647 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5648 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5649 they will be created.
5650
5651 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5652 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5653 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5654 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5655 @end ifset
5656
5657 @node Long
5658 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5659
5660 @cindex @code{long} directive
5661 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5662
5663 @ignore
5664 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5665 @c what it really ought to do
5666 @node Lsym
5667 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5668
5669 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5670 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5671 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5672 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5673 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5674 the same as the expression value:
5675 @smallexample
5676 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5677 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5678 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5679 @end smallexample
5680 @noindent
5681 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5682 @end ignore
5683
5684 @node Macro
5685 @section @code{.macro}
5686
5687 @cindex macros
5688 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5689 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5690 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5691
5692 @example
5693 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5694 .long \from
5695 .if \to-\from
5696 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5697 .endif
5698 .endm
5699 @end example
5700
5701 @noindent
5702 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5703
5704 @example
5705 .long 0
5706 .long 1
5707 .long 2
5708 .long 3
5709 .long 4
5710 .long 5
5711 @end example
5712
5713 @ftable @code
5714 @item .macro @var{macname}
5715 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5716 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5717 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5718 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5719 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5720 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5721 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5722 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5723 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5724 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5725 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5726 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5727
5728 @table @code
5729 @item .macro comm
5730 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5731 arguments.
5732
5733 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5734 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5735 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5736 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5737 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5738
5739 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5740 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5741 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5742 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5743 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5744 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5745 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5746 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5747
5748 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5749 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5750 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5751 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5752 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5753
5754 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5755 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5756 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5757
5758 @end table
5759
5760 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5761 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5762 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5763 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5764 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5765 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5766 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5767 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5768 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5769 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5770 this macro definition:
5771
5772 @example
5773 .macro label l
5774 \l:
5775 .endm
5776 @end example
5777
5778 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5779 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5780 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5781 identifier.
5782
5783 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5784 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5785 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5786 length specifier like this:
5787
5788 @example
5789 .macro opcode base length
5790 \base.\length
5791 .endm
5792 @end example
5793
5794 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5795 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5796 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5797
5798 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5799
5800 @table @code
5801 @item Insert white space
5802 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5803 solution. eg:
5804
5805 @example
5806 .macro label l
5807 \l :
5808 .endm
5809 @end example
5810
5811 @item Use @samp{\()}
5812 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5813 the following text. eg:
5814
5815 @example
5816 .macro opcode base length
5817 \base\().\length
5818 .endm
5819 @end example
5820
5821 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5822 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5823 used as a separator. eg:
5824
5825 @example
5826 .altmacro
5827 .macro label l
5828 l&:
5829 .endm
5830 @end example
5831 @end table
5832
5833 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5834 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5835 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5836
5837 @item .endm
5838 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5839 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5840
5841 @item .exitm
5842 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5843 Exit early from the current macro definition.
5844
5845 @cindex number of macros executed
5846 @cindex macros, count executed
5847 @item \@@
5848 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5849 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5850 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5851
5852 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5853 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5854 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5855 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5856 @end ftable
5857
5858 @node MRI
5859 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5860
5861 @cindex @code{mri} directive
5862 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5863 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
5864 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
5865 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5866 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5867
5868 @node Noaltmacro
5869 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
5870 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
5871
5872 @node Nolist
5873 @section @code{.nolist}
5874
5875 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
5876 @cindex listing control, turning off
5877 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5878 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5879 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5880 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5881 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5882
5883 @node Octa
5884 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
5885
5886 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
5887 @cindex @code{octa} directive
5888 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5889 @cindex sixteen byte integer
5890 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
5891 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
5892
5893 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5894 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
5895
5896 @node Offset
5897 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
5898
5899 @cindex @code{offset} directive
5900 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
5901 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
5902 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
5903 directive.
5904
5905 @node Org
5906 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
5907
5908 @cindex @code{org} directive
5909 @cindex location counter, advancing
5910 @cindex advancing location counter
5911 @cindex current address, advancing
5912 Advance the location counter of the current section to
5913 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
5914 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
5915 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
5916 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
5917 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
5918 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
5919 is the same as the current subsection.
5920
5921 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
5922 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
5923 backwards.
5924
5925 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
5926 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
5927 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
5928 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
5929 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
5930 a chance to share your improved assembler.
5931
5932 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
5933 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
5934 people's assemblers.
5935
5936 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
5937 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
5938 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
5939 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
5940
5941 @node P2align
5942 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
5943
5944 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
5945 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
5946 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
5947 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
5948 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
5949 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
5950 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
5951 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
5952
5953 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
5954 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
5955 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
5956 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
5957 with no-op instructions.
5958
5959 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
5960 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
5961 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
5962 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
5963 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
5964 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
5965 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
5966
5967 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
5968 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
5969 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
5970 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
5971 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
5972 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
5973 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
5974 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
5975 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
5976 undefined.
5977
5978 @ifset ELF
5979 @node PopSection
5980 @section @code{.popsection}
5981
5982 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
5983 @cindex Section Stack
5984 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5985 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5986 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
5987 (@pxref{Previous}).
5988
5989 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
5990 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
5991 stack.
5992 @end ifset
5993
5994 @ifset ELF
5995 @node Previous
5996 @section @code{.previous}
5997
5998 @cindex @code{previous} directive
5999 @cindex Section Stack
6000 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6001 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6002 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
6003 (@pxref{PopSection}).
6004
6005 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
6006 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
6007 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
6008 subsections). For example:
6009
6010 @smallexample
6011 .section A
6012 .subsection 1
6013 .word 0x1234
6014 .subsection 2
6015 .word 0x5678
6016 .previous
6017 .word 0x9abc
6018 @end smallexample
6019
6020 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
6021 section A. Whilst:
6022
6023 @smallexample
6024 .section A
6025 .subsection 1
6026 # Now in section A subsection 1
6027 .word 0x1234
6028 .section B
6029 .subsection 0
6030 # Now in section B subsection 0
6031 .word 0x5678
6032 .subsection 1
6033 # Now in section B subsection 1
6034 .word 0x9abc
6035 .previous
6036 # Now in section B subsection 0
6037 .word 0xdef0
6038 @end smallexample
6039
6040 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
6041 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
6042
6043 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
6044 the top section on the section stack.
6045 @end ifset
6046
6047 @node Print
6048 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
6049
6050 @cindex @code{print} directive
6051 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
6052 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
6053
6054 @ifset ELF
6055 @node Protected
6056 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
6057
6058 @cindex @code{protected} directive
6059 @cindex visibility
6060 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
6061 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
6062
6063 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
6064 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
6065 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
6066 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
6067 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
6068 this.
6069 @end ifset
6070
6071 @node Psize
6072 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6073
6074 @cindex @code{psize} directive
6075 @cindex listing control: paper size
6076 @cindex paper size, for listings
6077 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6078 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6079
6080 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6081 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6082 default width is 200 columns.
6083
6084 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6085 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6086 @code{.eject}).
6087
6088 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6089 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6090
6091 @node Purgem
6092 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6093
6094 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
6095 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6096 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
6097
6098 @ifset ELF
6099 @node PushSection
6100 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6101
6102 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6103 @cindex Section Stack
6104 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6105 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6106 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6107 (@pxref{Previous}).
6108
6109 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6110 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6111 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6112 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6113 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6114 @end ifset
6115
6116 @node Quad
6117 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6118
6119 @cindex @code{quad} directive
6120 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6121 each bignum, it emits
6122 @ifclear bignum-16
6123 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6124 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6125 @cindex eight-byte integer
6126 @cindex integer, 8-byte
6127
6128 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6129 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6130 @end ifclear
6131 @ifset bignum-16
6132 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6133 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6134 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
6135 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6136 @end ifset
6137
6138 @node Reloc
6139 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6140
6141 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6142 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6143 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6144 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6145 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6146 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6147 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6148 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6149 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6150 section.
6151
6152 @node Rept
6153 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6154
6155 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6156 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6157 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6158
6159 For example, assembling
6160
6161 @example
6162 .rept 3
6163 .long 0
6164 .endr
6165 @end example
6166
6167 is equivalent to assembling
6168
6169 @example
6170 .long 0
6171 .long 0
6172 .long 0
6173 @end example
6174
6175 @node Sbttl
6176 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6177
6178 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6179 @cindex subtitles for listings
6180 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6181 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6182 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6183
6184 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6185 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6186
6187 @ifset COFF
6188 @node Scl
6189 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6190
6191 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6192 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6193 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6194 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6195 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6196 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6197 symbolic debugging information.
6198 @ifset BOUT
6199
6200 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
6201 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
6202 accepts this directive but ignores it.
6203 @end ifset
6204 @end ifset
6205
6206 @ifset COFF-ELF
6207 @node Section
6208 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6209
6210 @cindex named section
6211 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6212 named @var{name}.
6213
6214 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6215 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6216 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6217
6218 @ifset COFF
6219 @ifset ELF
6220 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6221 @subheading COFF Version
6222 @end ifset
6223
6224 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6225 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6226 ways:
6227
6228 @smallexample
6229 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6230 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6231 @end smallexample
6232
6233 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6234 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6235 @table @code
6236 @item b
6237 bss section (uninitialized data)
6238 @item n
6239 section is not loaded
6240 @item w
6241 writable section
6242 @item d
6243 data section
6244 @item e
6245 exclude section from linking
6246 @item r
6247 read-only section
6248 @item x
6249 executable section
6250 @item s
6251 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6252 @item a
6253 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6254 @item y
6255 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6256 @item 0-9
6257 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6258 @end table
6259
6260 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6261 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6262 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6263 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6264 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6265
6266 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6267 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6268 @end ifset
6269
6270 @ifset ELF
6271 @ifset COFF
6272 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6273 @subheading ELF Version
6274 @end ifset
6275
6276 @cindex Section Stack
6277 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6278 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6279 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6280 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6281
6282 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6283 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6284
6285 @smallexample
6286 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6287 @end smallexample
6288
6289 @anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
6290 @kindex --sectname-subst
6291 @cindex section name substitution
6292 If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
6293 argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
6294 at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
6295
6296 @smallexample
6297 .macro exception_code
6298 .section %S.exception
6299 [exception code here]
6300 .previous
6301 .endm
6302
6303 .text
6304 [code]
6305 exception_code
6306 [...]
6307
6308 .section .init
6309 [init code]
6310 exception_code
6311 [...]
6312 @end smallexample
6313
6314 The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
6315 @code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
6316 This is useful e.g. to discriminate between anciliary sections that are
6317 tied to setup code to be discarded after use from anciliary sections that
6318 need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
6319 macros just for that purpose.
6320
6321 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6322 combination of the following characters:
6323 @table @code
6324 @item a
6325 section is allocatable
6326 @item e
6327 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6328 @item w
6329 section is writable
6330 @item x
6331 section is executable
6332 @item M
6333 section is mergeable
6334 @item S
6335 section contains zero terminated strings
6336 @item G
6337 section is a member of a section group
6338 @item T
6339 section is used for thread-local-storage
6340 @item ?
6341 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6342 @end table
6343
6344 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6345 @table @code
6346 @item @@progbits
6347 section contains data
6348 @item @@nobits
6349 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6350 @item @@note
6351 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6352 @item @@init_array
6353 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6354 @item @@fini_array
6355 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6356 @item @@preinit_array
6357 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6358 @end table
6359
6360 Many targets only support the first three section types.
6361
6362 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6363 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6364 @code{%} character.
6365
6366 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6367 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6368
6369 @smallexample
6370 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6371 @end smallexample
6372
6373 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6374 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6375 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6376 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6377 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6378 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6379 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6380 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6381 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6382
6383 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6384 be present along with an additional field like this:
6385
6386 @smallexample
6387 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6388 @end smallexample
6389
6390 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6391 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6392 @table @code
6393 @item comdat
6394 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6395 @item .gnu.linkonce
6396 an alias for comdat
6397 @end table
6398
6399 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6400 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6401
6402 @smallexample
6403 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6404 @end smallexample
6405
6406 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6407 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6408 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6409 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6410 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6411 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6412
6413 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6414 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6415 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6416 executable. The section will contain data.
6417
6418 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6419 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6420
6421 @smallexample
6422 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6423 @end smallexample
6424
6425 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6426 separated flags:
6427 @table @code
6428 @item #alloc
6429 section is allocatable
6430 @item #write
6431 section is writable
6432 @item #execinstr
6433 section is executable
6434 @item #exclude
6435 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6436 @item #tls
6437 section is used for thread local storage
6438 @end table
6439
6440 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6441 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6442 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6443 work.
6444 @end ifset
6445 @end ifset
6446
6447 @node Set
6448 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6449
6450 @cindex @code{set} directive
6451 @cindex symbol value, setting
6452 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6453 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6454 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6455 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6456
6457 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
6458 values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions
6459 involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
6460 being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the
6461 addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
6462 final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
6463 the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
6464 different symbols.
6465
6466 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6467 file is the last value stored into it.
6468
6469 @ifset Z80
6470 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6471 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6472 @end ifset
6473
6474 @node Short
6475 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6476
6477 @cindex @code{short} directive
6478 @ifset GENERIC
6479 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6480 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6481
6482 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6483 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6484 @end ifset
6485 @ifclear GENERIC
6486 @ifset W16
6487 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6488 @end ifset
6489 @ifset W32
6490 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6491 a 16 bit number for each.
6492 @end ifset
6493 @end ifclear
6494
6495 @node Single
6496 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6497
6498 @cindex @code{single} directive
6499 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6500 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6501 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6502 @ifset GENERIC
6503 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6504 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6505 @end ifset
6506 @ifclear GENERIC
6507 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6508 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6509 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6510 @end ifset
6511 @end ifclear
6512
6513 @ifset COFF-ELF
6514 @node Size
6515 @section @code{.size}
6516
6517 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6518
6519 @ifset COFF
6520 @ifset ELF
6521 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6522 @subheading COFF Version
6523 @end ifset
6524
6525 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6526 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6527 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6528
6529 @smallexample
6530 .size @var{expression}
6531 @end smallexample
6532
6533 @ifset BOUT
6534 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6535 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6536 ignores it.
6537 @end ifset
6538 @end ifset
6539
6540 @ifset ELF
6541 @ifset COFF
6542 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6543 @subheading ELF Version
6544 @end ifset
6545
6546 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6547 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6548
6549 @smallexample
6550 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6551 @end smallexample
6552
6553 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6554 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6555 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6556 symbols.
6557 @end ifset
6558 @end ifset
6559
6560 @ifclear no-space-dir
6561 @node Skip
6562 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6563
6564 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6565 @cindex filling memory
6566 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6567 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6568 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6569 @samp{.space}.
6570 @end ifclear
6571
6572 @node Sleb128
6573 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6574
6575 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6576 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6577 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6578 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6579
6580 @ifclear no-space-dir
6581 @node Space
6582 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6583
6584 @cindex @code{space} directive
6585 @cindex filling memory
6586 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6587 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6588 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6589 as @samp{.skip}.
6590
6591 @ifset HPPA
6592 @quotation
6593 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6594 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6595 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6596 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6597 for a summary.
6598 @end quotation
6599 @end ifset
6600 @end ifclear
6601
6602 @ifset have-stabs
6603 @node Stab
6604 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6605
6606 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6607 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6608 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6609 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6610 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6611 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6612 Up to five fields are required:
6613
6614 @table @var
6615 @item string
6616 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6617 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6618 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6619 using this field.
6620
6621 @item type
6622 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6623 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6624 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6625
6626 @item other
6627 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6628 low 8 bits of this expression.
6629
6630 @item desc
6631 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6632 bits of this expression.
6633
6634 @item value
6635 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6636 @end table
6637
6638 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6639 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6640 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6641 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6642
6643 @table @code
6644 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6645 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6646
6647 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6648 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6649 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6650 strings.
6651
6652 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6653 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6654 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6655 assembled.
6656
6657 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6658 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6659 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6660
6661 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6662 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6663 All five fields are specified.
6664 @end table
6665 @end ifset
6666 @c end have-stabs
6667
6668 @node String
6669 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6670 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6671
6672 @cindex string, copying to object file
6673 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6674 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6675 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6676 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6677 @cindex @code{string} directive
6678 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6679 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6680 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6681 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6682
6683 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6684 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6685 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6686 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6687
6688 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6689 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6690 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6691 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6692
6693 Example:
6694 @smallexample
6695 .string32 "BYE"
6696 expands to:
6697 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6698 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6699 @end smallexample
6700
6701
6702 @node Struct
6703 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6704
6705 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6706 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6707 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6708 @smallexample
6709 .struct 0
6710 field1:
6711 .struct field1 + 4
6712 field2:
6713 .struct field2 + 4
6714 field3:
6715 @end smallexample
6716 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6717 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6718 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6719 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6720 before further assembly.
6721
6722 @ifset ELF
6723 @node SubSection
6724 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6725
6726 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6727 @cindex Section Stack
6728 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6729 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6730 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6731 (@pxref{Previous}).
6732
6733 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6734 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6735 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6736 @end ifset
6737
6738 @ifset ELF
6739 @node Symver
6740 @section @code{.symver}
6741 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6742 @cindex symbol versioning
6743 @cindex versions of symbols
6744 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6745 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6746 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6747 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6748 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6749 shared library.
6750
6751 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6752 @smallexample
6753 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6754 @end smallexample
6755 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6756 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6757 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6758 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6759 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6760 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6761 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6762 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6763 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6764 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6765 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6766 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6767 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6768 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6769
6770 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6771 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6772 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6773 symbol table.
6774
6775 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6776 @smallexample
6777 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6778 @end smallexample
6779 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6780 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6781 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6782 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6783
6784 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6785 @smallexample
6786 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6787 @end smallexample
6788 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6789 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6790 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6791 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6792 @end ifset
6793
6794 @ifset COFF
6795 @node Tag
6796 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6797
6798 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6799 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6800 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6801 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6802 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6803 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6804 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6805 @ifset BOUT
6806
6807 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6808 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6809 ignores it.
6810 @end ifset
6811 @end ifset
6812
6813 @node Text
6814 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6815
6816 @cindex @code{text} directive
6817 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6818 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6819 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6820 is used.
6821
6822 @node Title
6823 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6824
6825 @cindex @code{title} directive
6826 @cindex listing control: title line
6827 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6828 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6829
6830 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6831 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6832
6833 @ifset COFF-ELF
6834 @node Type
6835 @section @code{.type}
6836
6837 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6838
6839 @ifset COFF
6840 @ifset ELF
6841 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6842 @subheading COFF Version
6843 @end ifset
6844
6845 @cindex COFF symbol type
6846 @cindex symbol type, COFF
6847 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6848 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6849 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6850
6851 @smallexample
6852 .type @var{int}
6853 @end smallexample
6854
6855 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
6856 entry.
6857
6858 @ifset BOUT
6859 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
6860 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
6861 directive but ignores it.
6862 @end ifset
6863 @end ifset
6864
6865 @ifset ELF
6866 @ifset COFF
6867 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6868 @subheading ELF Version
6869 @end ifset
6870
6871 @cindex ELF symbol type
6872 @cindex symbol type, ELF
6873 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
6874 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
6875
6876 @smallexample
6877 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
6878 @end smallexample
6879
6880 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
6881 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
6882 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
6883 compatibility with various other assemblers.
6884
6885 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
6886 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
6887 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
6888 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
6889 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
6890 assemblers.
6891
6892 The syntaxes supported are:
6893
6894 @smallexample
6895 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
6896 .type <name>,#<type>
6897 .type <name>,@@<type>
6898 .type <name>,%<type>
6899 .type <name>,"<type>"
6900 @end smallexample
6901
6902 The types supported are:
6903
6904 @table @gcctabopt
6905 @item STT_FUNC
6906 @itemx function
6907 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
6908
6909 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
6910 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
6911 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
6912 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
6913
6914 @item STT_OBJECT
6915 @itemx object
6916 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
6917
6918 @item STT_TLS
6919 @itemx tls_object
6920 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
6921
6922 @item STT_COMMON
6923 @itemx common
6924 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
6925
6926 @item STT_NOTYPE
6927 @itemx notype
6928 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
6929
6930 @item gnu_unique_object
6931 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
6932 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
6933 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
6934 systems).
6935
6936 @end table
6937
6938 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
6939
6940 @end ifset
6941 @end ifset
6942
6943 @node Uleb128
6944 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
6945
6946 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
6947 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
6948 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6949 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
6950
6951 @ifset COFF
6952 @node Val
6953 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
6954
6955 @cindex @code{val} directive
6956 @cindex COFF value attribute
6957 @cindex value attribute, COFF
6958 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
6959 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
6960 entry.
6961 @ifset BOUT
6962
6963 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
6964 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
6965 @end ifset
6966 @end ifset
6967
6968 @ifset ELF
6969 @node Version
6970 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
6971
6972 @cindex @code{version} directive
6973 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
6974 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
6975 @end ifset
6976
6977 @ifset ELF
6978 @node VTableEntry
6979 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
6980
6981 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
6982 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
6983 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
6984
6985 @node VTableInherit
6986 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
6987
6988 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
6989 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
6990 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
6991 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
6992 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
6993 @end ifset
6994
6995 @node Warning
6996 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
6997 @cindex warning directive
6998 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
6999 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
7000
7001 @node Weak
7002 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
7003
7004 @cindex @code{weak} directive
7005 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7006 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7007
7008 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
7009 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7010 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7011
7012 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
7013 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
7014 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
7015
7016 @node Weakref
7017 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
7018
7019 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
7020 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
7021 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
7022 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
7023 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
7024 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
7025
7026 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
7027 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
7028 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
7029 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
7030 had the references to the alias removed.
7031
7032 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
7033 within the assembler.
7034
7035 @node Word
7036 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
7037
7038 @cindex @code{word} directive
7039 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
7040 separated by commas.
7041 @ifclear GENERIC
7042 @ifset W32
7043 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
7044 @end ifset
7045 @ifset W16
7046 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
7047 @end ifset
7048 @end ifclear
7049 @ifset GENERIC
7050
7051 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
7052 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
7053 @end ifset
7054
7055 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
7056 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
7057 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7058 @cindex difference tables altered
7059 @cindex altered difference tables
7060 @quotation
7061 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
7062 @end quotation
7063
7064 @ifset GENERIC
7065 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
7066 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
7067 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
7068 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
7069
7070 @end ifset
7071 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
7072 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
7073 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
7074 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
7075 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
7076 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
7077 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
7078 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
7079 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
7080 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
7081 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
7082 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
7083 @code{sym2}.
7084
7085 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
7086 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
7087 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
7088 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
7089 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
7090 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
7091 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
7092
7093 @ifset INTERNALS
7094 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
7095 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
7096 assembly language programmers.
7097 @end ifset
7098 @end ifset
7099 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7100
7101 @ifclear no-space-dir
7102 @node Zero
7103 @section @code{.zero @var{size}}
7104
7105 @cindex @code{zero} directive
7106 @cindex filling memory with zero bytes
7107 This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes. @var{size} must be an absolute
7108 expression. This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
7109 so in can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
7110 instead of zero. Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
7111 @end ifclear
7112
7113 @node Deprecated
7114 @section Deprecated Directives
7115
7116 @cindex deprecated directives
7117 @cindex obsolescent directives
7118 One day these directives won't work.
7119 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
7120 @table @t
7121 @item .abort
7122 @item .line
7123 @end table
7124
7125 @ifset ELF
7126 @node Object Attributes
7127 @chapter Object Attributes
7128 @cindex object attributes
7129
7130 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7131 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
7132 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
7133 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7134 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7135 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7136 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
7137 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7138 newer generation at run-time.
7139
7140 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
7141 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
7142 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7143 correctly.
7144
7145 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
7146 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
7147 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
7148 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
7149 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
7150 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7151
7152 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7153 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7154
7155 @menu
7156 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7157 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
7158 @end menu
7159
7160 @node GNU Object Attributes
7161 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7162
7163 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7164 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7165
7166 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7167 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7168 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
7169 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7170 architecture-dependent ones.
7171
7172 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7173
7174 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7175
7176 @table @r
7177 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
7178 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7179 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7180 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7181 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7182 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7183 @end table
7184
7185 @subsection MIPS Attributes
7186
7187 @table @r
7188 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7189 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7190
7191 @itemize @bullet
7192 @item
7193 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7194 @item
7195 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7196 double-precision FPU.
7197 @item
7198 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7199 @item
7200 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7201 @item
7202 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7203 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7204 number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7205 @item
7206 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7207 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7208 general-purpose registers.
7209 @item
7210 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7211 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7212 @item
7213 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7214 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7215 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7216 @end itemize
7217 @end table
7218
7219 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7220
7221 @table @r
7222 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7223 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7224
7225 @itemize @bullet
7226 @item
7227 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7228 @item
7229 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7230 @item
7231 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7232 @item
7233 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7234 @end itemize
7235
7236 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7237 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7238
7239 @itemize @bullet
7240 @item
7241 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7242 @item
7243 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7244 @item
7245 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7246 @item
7247 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7248 @end itemize
7249 @end table
7250
7251 @subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
7252
7253 @table @r
7254 @item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
7255 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7256
7257 @itemize @bullet
7258 @item
7259 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7260 @item
7261 1 for files using software vector ABI.
7262 @item
7263 2 for files using hardware vector ABI.
7264 @end itemize
7265 @end table
7266
7267 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7268 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7269
7270 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7271 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7272 mailing list.
7273
7274 @itemize @bullet
7275 @item
7276 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7277 @item
7278 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7279 @item
7280 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7281 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7282 @item
7283 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7284 @item
7285 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7286 @item
7287 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7288 @end itemize
7289
7290 @end ifset
7291
7292 @ifset GENERIC
7293 @node Machine Dependencies
7294 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7295
7296 @cindex machine dependencies
7297 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7298 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7299 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7300 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7301 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7302 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7303 optimization.
7304
7305 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7306 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7307 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7308
7309 @menu
7310 @ifset AARCH64
7311 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7312 @end ifset
7313 @ifset ALPHA
7314 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7315 @end ifset
7316 @ifset ARC
7317 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7318 @end ifset
7319 @ifset ARM
7320 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7321 @end ifset
7322 @ifset AVR
7323 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7324 @end ifset
7325 @ifset Blackfin
7326 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7327 @end ifset
7328 @ifset CR16
7329 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7330 @end ifset
7331 @ifset CRIS
7332 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7333 @end ifset
7334 @ifset D10V
7335 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7336 @end ifset
7337 @ifset D30V
7338 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7339 @end ifset
7340 @ifset EPIPHANY
7341 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7342 @end ifset
7343 @ifset H8/300
7344 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7345 @end ifset
7346 @ifset HPPA
7347 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7348 @end ifset
7349 @ifset I370
7350 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7351 @end ifset
7352 @ifset I80386
7353 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7354 @end ifset
7355 @ifset I860
7356 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7357 @end ifset
7358 @ifset I960
7359 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7360 @end ifset
7361 @ifset IA64
7362 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7363 @end ifset
7364 @ifset IP2K
7365 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7366 @end ifset
7367 @ifset LM32
7368 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7369 @end ifset
7370 @ifset M32C
7371 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7372 @end ifset
7373 @ifset M32R
7374 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7375 @end ifset
7376 @ifset M680X0
7377 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7378 @end ifset
7379 @ifset M68HC11
7380 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7381 @end ifset
7382 @ifset METAG
7383 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7384 @end ifset
7385 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7386 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7387 @end ifset
7388 @ifset MIPS
7389 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7390 @end ifset
7391 @ifset MMIX
7392 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7393 @end ifset
7394 @ifset MSP430
7395 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7396 @end ifset
7397 @ifset NDS32
7398 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7399 @end ifset
7400 @ifset NIOSII
7401 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7402 @end ifset
7403 @ifset NS32K
7404 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7405 @end ifset
7406 @ifset PDP11
7407 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7408 @end ifset
7409 @ifset PJ
7410 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7411 @end ifset
7412 @ifset PPC
7413 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7414 @end ifset
7415 @ifset RL78
7416 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7417 @end ifset
7418 @ifset RX
7419 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7420 @end ifset
7421 @ifset S390
7422 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7423 @end ifset
7424 @ifset SCORE
7425 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7426 @end ifset
7427 @ifset SH
7428 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7429 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7430 @end ifset
7431 @ifset SPARC
7432 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7433 @end ifset
7434 @ifset TIC54X
7435 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7436 @end ifset
7437 @ifset TIC6X
7438 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7439 @end ifset
7440 @ifset TILEGX
7441 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7442 @end ifset
7443 @ifset TILEPRO
7444 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7445 @end ifset
7446 @ifset V850
7447 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7448 @end ifset
7449 @ifset VAX
7450 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7451 @end ifset
7452 @ifset VISIUM
7453 * Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features
7454 @end ifset
7455 @ifset XGATE
7456 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7457 @end ifset
7458 @ifset XSTORMY16
7459 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7460 @end ifset
7461 @ifset XTENSA
7462 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7463 @end ifset
7464 @ifset Z80
7465 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7466 @end ifset
7467 @ifset Z8000
7468 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7469 @end ifset
7470 @end menu
7471
7472 @lowersections
7473 @end ifset
7474
7475 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7476 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7477 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7478 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7479 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7480 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7481 @c in both conditional blocks.
7482
7483 @ifset AARCH64
7484 @include c-aarch64.texi
7485 @end ifset
7486
7487 @ifset ALPHA
7488 @include c-alpha.texi
7489 @end ifset
7490
7491 @ifset ARC
7492 @include c-arc.texi
7493 @end ifset
7494
7495 @ifset ARM
7496 @include c-arm.texi
7497 @end ifset
7498
7499 @ifset AVR
7500 @include c-avr.texi
7501 @end ifset
7502
7503 @ifset Blackfin
7504 @include c-bfin.texi
7505 @end ifset
7506
7507 @ifset CR16
7508 @include c-cr16.texi
7509 @end ifset
7510
7511 @ifset CRIS
7512 @include c-cris.texi
7513 @end ifset
7514
7515 @ifset Renesas-all
7516 @ifclear GENERIC
7517 @node Machine Dependencies
7518 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7519
7520 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7521 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7522 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7523 family.
7524
7525 @menu
7526 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7527 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7528 @end menu
7529 @lowersections
7530 @end ifclear
7531 @end ifset
7532
7533 @ifset D10V
7534 @include c-d10v.texi
7535 @end ifset
7536
7537 @ifset D30V
7538 @include c-d30v.texi
7539 @end ifset
7540
7541 @ifset EPIPHANY
7542 @include c-epiphany.texi
7543 @end ifset
7544
7545 @ifset H8/300
7546 @include c-h8300.texi
7547 @end ifset
7548
7549 @ifset HPPA
7550 @include c-hppa.texi
7551 @end ifset
7552
7553 @ifset I370
7554 @include c-i370.texi
7555 @end ifset
7556
7557 @ifset I80386
7558 @include c-i386.texi
7559 @end ifset
7560
7561 @ifset I860
7562 @include c-i860.texi
7563 @end ifset
7564
7565 @ifset I960
7566 @include c-i960.texi
7567 @end ifset
7568
7569 @ifset IA64
7570 @include c-ia64.texi
7571 @end ifset
7572
7573 @ifset IP2K
7574 @include c-ip2k.texi
7575 @end ifset
7576
7577 @ifset LM32
7578 @include c-lm32.texi
7579 @end ifset
7580
7581 @ifset M32C
7582 @include c-m32c.texi
7583 @end ifset
7584
7585 @ifset M32R
7586 @include c-m32r.texi
7587 @end ifset
7588
7589 @ifset M680X0
7590 @include c-m68k.texi
7591 @end ifset
7592
7593 @ifset M68HC11
7594 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7595 @end ifset
7596
7597 @ifset METAG
7598 @include c-metag.texi
7599 @end ifset
7600
7601 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7602 @include c-microblaze.texi
7603 @end ifset
7604
7605 @ifset MIPS
7606 @include c-mips.texi
7607 @end ifset
7608
7609 @ifset MMIX
7610 @include c-mmix.texi
7611 @end ifset
7612
7613 @ifset MSP430
7614 @include c-msp430.texi
7615 @end ifset
7616
7617 @ifset NDS32
7618 @include c-nds32.texi
7619 @end ifset
7620
7621 @ifset NIOSII
7622 @include c-nios2.texi
7623 @end ifset
7624
7625 @ifset NS32K
7626 @include c-ns32k.texi
7627 @end ifset
7628
7629 @ifset PDP11
7630 @include c-pdp11.texi
7631 @end ifset
7632
7633 @ifset PJ
7634 @include c-pj.texi
7635 @end ifset
7636
7637 @ifset PPC
7638 @include c-ppc.texi
7639 @end ifset
7640
7641 @ifset RL78
7642 @include c-rl78.texi
7643 @end ifset
7644
7645 @ifset RX
7646 @include c-rx.texi
7647 @end ifset
7648
7649 @ifset S390
7650 @include c-s390.texi
7651 @end ifset
7652
7653 @ifset SCORE
7654 @include c-score.texi
7655 @end ifset
7656
7657 @ifset SH
7658 @include c-sh.texi
7659 @include c-sh64.texi
7660 @end ifset
7661
7662 @ifset SPARC
7663 @include c-sparc.texi
7664 @end ifset
7665
7666 @ifset TIC54X
7667 @include c-tic54x.texi
7668 @end ifset
7669
7670 @ifset TIC6X
7671 @include c-tic6x.texi
7672 @end ifset
7673
7674 @ifset TILEGX
7675 @include c-tilegx.texi
7676 @end ifset
7677
7678 @ifset TILEPRO
7679 @include c-tilepro.texi
7680 @end ifset
7681
7682 @ifset V850
7683 @include c-v850.texi
7684 @end ifset
7685
7686 @ifset VAX
7687 @include c-vax.texi
7688 @end ifset
7689
7690 @ifset VISIUM
7691 @include c-visium.texi
7692 @end ifset
7693
7694 @ifset XGATE
7695 @include c-xgate.texi
7696 @end ifset
7697
7698 @ifset XSTORMY16
7699 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7700 @end ifset
7701
7702 @ifset XTENSA
7703 @include c-xtensa.texi
7704 @end ifset
7705
7706 @ifset Z80
7707 @include c-z80.texi
7708 @end ifset
7709
7710 @ifset Z8000
7711 @include c-z8k.texi
7712 @end ifset
7713
7714 @ifset GENERIC
7715 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7716 @raisesections
7717 @end ifset
7718
7719 @node Reporting Bugs
7720 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7721 @cindex bugs in assembler
7722 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7723
7724 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7725
7726 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7727 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7728 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7729 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7730
7731 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7732 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7733
7734 @menu
7735 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7736 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7737 @end menu
7738
7739 @node Bug Criteria
7740 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7741 @cindex bug criteria
7742
7743 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7744
7745 @itemize @bullet
7746 @cindex fatal signal
7747 @cindex assembler crash
7748 @cindex crash of assembler
7749 @item
7750 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7751 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7752
7753 @cindex error on valid input
7754 @item
7755 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7756
7757 @cindex invalid input
7758 @item
7759 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7760 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7761 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7762
7763 @item
7764 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7765 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7766 @end itemize
7767
7768 @node Bug Reporting
7769 @section How to Report Bugs
7770 @cindex bug reports
7771 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7772
7773 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7774 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7775 contact that organization first.
7776
7777 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7778 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7779 distribution.
7780
7781 @ifset BUGURL
7782 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7783 to @value{BUGURL}.
7784 @end ifset
7785
7786 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7787 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7788 fact or leave it out, state it!
7789
7790 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7791 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
7792 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
7793 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7794 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7795 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7796 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
7797 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7798 and the most helpful.
7799
7800 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7801 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7802 that the bug has not been reported previously.
7803
7804 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7805 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7806 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7807 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7808
7809 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7810
7811 @itemize @bullet
7812 @item
7813 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7814 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7815
7816 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7817 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7818
7819 @item
7820 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7821
7822 @item
7823 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7824 version number.
7825
7826 @item
7827 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7828 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7829
7830 @item
7831 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7832 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7833 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7834
7835 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7836 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7837
7838 @item
7839 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
7840 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7841 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7842 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7843 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7844 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7845 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7846
7847 @item
7848 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7849 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7850
7851 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7852 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7853 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
7854 make a mistake.
7855
7856 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
7857 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
7858 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
7859 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
7860 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
7861 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
7862 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
7863 observations.
7864
7865 @item
7866 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
7867 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
7868 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
7869 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
7870 by line number.
7871
7872 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7873 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7874 @end itemize
7875
7876 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7877
7878 @itemize @bullet
7879 @item
7880 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7881
7882 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7883 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7884 changes will not affect it.
7885
7886 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7887 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7888 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7889 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7890
7891 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7892 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7893 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7894 less time, and so on.
7895
7896 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7897 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7898
7899 @item
7900 A patch for the bug.
7901
7902 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7903 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7904 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7905 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7906
7907 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
7908 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
7909 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
7910 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7911
7912 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7913 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7914 help us to understand.
7915
7916 @item
7917 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7918
7919 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7920 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7921 @end itemize
7922
7923 @node Acknowledgements
7924 @chapter Acknowledgements
7925
7926 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
7927 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
7928 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
7929 @c (October 2012),
7930 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
7931
7932 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
7933 more details?}
7934
7935 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
7936 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
7937 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
7938
7939 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
7940 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
7941 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
7942 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
7943 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
7944 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
7945 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
7946 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
7947 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
7948 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
7949
7950 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
7951 in format-specific I/O modules.
7952
7953 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
7954 has done much work with it since.
7955
7956 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
7957
7958 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
7959
7960 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
7961 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
7962
7963 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
7964 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
7965 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
7966 support a.out format.
7967
7968 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
7969 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
7970 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
7971 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
7972 targets.
7973
7974 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
7975 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
7976 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
7977 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
7978 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
7979 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
7980 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
7981
7982 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
7983 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
7984 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
7985 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
7986
7987 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
7988
7989 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
7990
7991 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
7992 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
7993 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
7994 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
7995
7996 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
7997 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
7998 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
7999 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
8000 and some initial 64-bit support).
8001
8002 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
8003
8004 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
8005 support for openVMS/Alpha.
8006
8007 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
8008 flavors.
8009
8010 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
8011 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
8012
8013 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
8014 configuration enhancements.
8015
8016 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
8017
8018 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
8019 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
8020 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
8021 intentionally leaving anyone out.
8022
8023 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8024 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8025 @include fdl.texi
8026
8027 @node AS Index
8028 @unnumbered AS Index
8029
8030 @printindex cp
8031
8032 @bye
8033 @c Local Variables:
8034 @c fill-column: 79
8035 @c End:
This page took 0.195129 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.